Keyence Iv Series 343ub

206GB

Vision Sensor

IV Series ’s Manual (Monitor)

Read this manual before use. After you read this manual, keep it in a safe place for future reference.

1

Getting Started

2

Installation and Connection

3

Basic Operation

4

Settings Navigator

(Setting the Judgment Condition)

5

Operating/Adjusting

6

Useful Features/ Various Functions

7

Controlling with the Input/Output Line

8

Specifications

A

Status Table, Troubleshooting

Introduction

Introduction Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance. Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.

Symbols The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these messages carefully.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information. It indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.

Cautions (1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited. The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice. (2) (3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any mistakes or questions, please a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual. (4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit. (5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced. The company names and product names used in this manual are ed trademarks or the trademarks of their respective companies.

Safety Information for IV Series

Safety Information for IV Series General Precautions yyDo not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body. yyThis product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.

yyYou must that the IV Series are operating correctly in of functionality and performance before the start and the operation of the IV Series. yyWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of a problem occurring.

yyKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV Series if it is used in manner that differs from the IV Series specifications contained in this instruction manual or if the IV Series are modified by yourself. yyWhen the IV Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment. yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It may cause condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals. yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.

Safety precautions on LED product Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual. Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result. yyDo not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam. yyDo not disassemble this product. The laser radiation emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is disassembled. yyDo not direct the beam at people or into areas where people might be present. yyBe careful of the path of the LED beam. If there is a possibility that the operator may be exposed to the specular or diffuse reflections, block the beam by installing a protective enclosure. yyInstall this product so that the path of the LED beam is not as the same height as that of human eye.

206GB

1

Important Instructions

Important Instructions Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV Series and to ensure that it is used properly.

Precautions on use yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when the cable is to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a product damage. yyUse this product in the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.

yyFor instructions yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost. yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction. yyThe enclosure rating of the monitor (IV-M30) is IP40. This is not designed for water proof so be careful to operate it. yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol. Doing so may change the color or shape of the unit. yyIf the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable, wipe off the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth. yyFor an LCD yyDo not press the touch with the tip of your nail or anything that has a sharp tip such as a pen or a screwdriver. Doing so may cause damage. yyDo not apply shock to the touch or press it with excessive force. Doing so may cause damage. yyThe LCD may have some dots that are always lit (bright dots) or ones that are always unlit (black dots). This phenomenon is not a problem. yyDue to the unique characteristics of an LCD, displaying the same image for a long time may cause an afterimage. yyFor USB memory yyUse products recommended by KEYENCE. yyA USB memory device with a security function cannot be used. yyUnplug the USB memory when turning on or off the power of IV Series. yyDo not remove the USB memory while the USB is being written on. Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost or it may cause a damage. yyFor external master image registration When the external master image registration is used frequently, set [Write ROM when using “Ext. Master Save”?] of the input option to [No] for nonvolatile memory protection of the internal sensor. When the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write for 100,000 times. yyFor automatic focus function yyAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation. This will not activate during the operation. yyFocusing position can be ed in each program. The program configurations are guaranteed to switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for each program, set [Auto Focus Adj Pos] to [Common] for extending the life-span. yyDo not apply shock or vibration during the focusing position adjustment. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.

2

- IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

Important Instructions

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV Series in an abnormal condition could cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction. our office for repair. yyIf water or debris enters the IV Series. yyIf the IV Series is dropped or the case is damaged. yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV Series.

Precautions on installation yyTo use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to do so may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction. yyOutdoors yyAltitude above 2000 m yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a malfunction may occur. yyMount the sensor onto the insulated attached mounting adapter. yyGround the FG cable (drain cable) of the sensor. yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed. yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible. yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic field (such as solenoid or chopper). yySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line. yyFor power supply yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC power supply configured with an isolation transformer. yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground terminal. yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration. yyWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.


3

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Precautions on Regulations and Standards For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-150MA/ IV-2000M/IV-2000MA UL Certification This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product. yyUL File No. E301717 yyCategory NRKH, NRKH7 Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product. yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code). yyPower supply/ External input/ Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only. yyUse with an over current protection device which is rated 24 V or more and not more than 1A. yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)

CE Marking Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) zz yyApplicable Standard EMI: EN60947-5-2, Class A EMS: EN60947-5-2 yyThe length of power I/O cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m. Remarks: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.

Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) zz yyApplicable Standard: EN62471

4


Precautions on Regulations and Standards

For IV-M30 UL Certification This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product. yyUL File No. E207185 yyCategory NRAQ, NRAQ7 Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product. yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code). yyThis product is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure.

CE Marking Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) zz yyApplicable Standard EMI: EN61326-1, Class A EMS: EN61326-1 yyThe length of Monitor power cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m. Remarks: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.


5

Version of the IV Series

Version of the IV Series You can the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV-150/500/2000) and the monitor (IV-M30) from the KEYENCE web site. Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method. URL : http://www.keyence.com/

Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000) Version

Description

R1.00.00

The initial version.

R1.01.00

The processing time has been speeded up.

R1.10.00

The processing time and the response time to program switching input have been speeded up.

R2.00.00

This is the version of this document. The following functions have been added. yyLogic output yyTotal status NG output yyRUN output yyFTP client function yyField network (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET)

Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30) Version

6

Description

R1.00.00

The initial version.

R1.01.01

Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).

R1.02.00

Compatibility with German.

R1.10.00

Compatibility with Tool Auto Tuning using a registration information file (*.ivt).

R2.00.00

This is the version of this document. Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.


Structure of This Manual

Structure of This Manual 1

Getting Started

This chapter explains the system configuration and overview of IV Series, package contents, and names and functions of each part.

2


This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and monitor, and explains connection procedures.

3

Basic Operation

This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow of the IV Series.

4

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

5

Operating/Adjusting

6


7


8

Specifications

A

Appendices

This chapter explains how to set the sensors using the Settings Navigator.

1 2 3 4 5

This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the IV Series.

6

This chapter explains the useful and detailed features.

7

This chapter explains how the input and output terminals control each operation.

8

This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.

A

This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.


7

Contents

Contents Introduction Symbols Cautions Safety Information for IV Series..............................1 General Precautions............................................1 Safety precautions on LED product.....................1 Important Instructions..............................................2 Precautions on use..............................................2 Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs..................................................................3 Precautions on installation...................................3 Precautions on Regulations and Standards............4 For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/ IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA............4 UL Certification.................................................4 CE Marking.......................................................4 For IV-M30...........................................................5 UL Certification.................................................5 CE Marking.......................................................5 Version of the IV Series...........................................6 Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)................................................6 Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30).........6 Structure of This Manual.........................................7 Contents..................................................................8

Chapter 1 Getting Started System Configuration...........................................1-2 Basic configurations of IV Series......................1-2 Connecting the monitor and single sensor....1-2 Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors.............................................1-3 Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4 IV Series...........................................................1-4 Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)....1-4 Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...............1-5 Judgment processing flow................................1-6 Checking the Package Contents..........................1-8 Sensor...............................................................1-8 Optional parts for the sensor.............................1-8 Dome attachment..........................................1-8 Polarized visible light filter attachment..........1-8 Infrared polarization filter attachment............1-8 Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)....1-9 Mounting adapter...........................................1-9 Front cover (for replacement)........................1-9 Bracket..........................................................1-9 Intelligent Monitor............................................1-10 Optional parts for the monitor.........................1-10 Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire).................................1-10 Protection sheet...........................................1-10 USB memory (1GB).....................................1-10 Stylus...........................................................1-10 Wall mounting adapter.................................1-11 mounting adapter..............................1-11 DIN mounting adapter.................................1-11 Communication Cable.....................................1-12 Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)...........1-12 8

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-12 Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-13 Sensor.............................................................1-13 Name and function of each part of „„ the sensor............................................1-13 Operation of the indicator light.............1-14 „„ Monitor............................................................1-15

Chapter 2 Installation and Connection Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2 Checking the view and installed distance.........2-2 Mounting the sensor.........................................2-4 Mounting the mounting adapter.....................2-4 Mounting on the wall..............................2-4 „„ Mounting from the jig side......................2-4 „„ Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter..........................................................2-4 Unmounting the sensor.....................................2-5 Mounting the attachment..................................2-6 Using the dome attachment...........................2-6 Mounting the dome attachment.............2-6 „„ Installed distance of the dome „„ attachment.............................................2-6 Using the polarizing filter attachment............2-7 Mounting the Monitor............................................2-8 Mounting to a wall.............................................2-8 Hanging on the hook.....................................2-8 Mounting with the wall mounting adapter......2-8 Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter....2-9 Mounting to a ........................................2-10 Mounting to a .....................................2-10 cutting dimension..............................2-10 Mounting to the DIN rail..................................2-11 Mounting using DIN mounting adapter........2-11 Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter...........................2-11 Cables................................................................2-12 Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor.......................................................2-12 Specification of I/O circuit and current of the sensor.......................................................2-14 Input circuit..................................................2-14 No-voltage input „„ (When the NPN output is selected).....2-14 Voltage input „„ (When the PNP output is selected)......2-14 Output circuit...............................................2-14 When the NPN output is selected........2-14 „„ When the PNP output is selected........2-14 „„ Connecting the power cable of the monitor....2-15 Connecting the sensor and the monitor..........2-16 Connecting directly......................................2-16 Connecting via network...............................2-16 Connecting the monitor cable/ Ethernet cable.............................................2-17


Contents

Chapter 3 Basic Operation Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2 Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4 Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5 Operation flow when the power is turned on.....3-5 Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Direct Connection)...........................................3-6 Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Network Connection).......................................3-7 Setting the network address of the monitor....3-7 Searching for a sensor to be connected........3-8 Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address........................................................3-10 Operation for initial startup of the sensor........3-11 Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-12 Initializing the sensor......................................3-12 Initializing the monitor.....................................3-13 Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-14 Editing the value with the slider......................3-14 Editing the tool window...................................3-15 Inputting characters........................................3-16 Selecting the file in the USB memory.............3-17

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) Settings Navigator................................................4-2 Flow in the Settings Navigator..........................4-2 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3 Starting the Settings Navigator.........................4-3 Settings Navigator screen and operation flow....4-4 Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...........4-5 Finishing the Settings Navigator.......................4-5 Finishing by completing all steps...................4-5 Finishing without completing the step............4-5 1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)....4-6 Setting the Image Optimization.........................4-6 Main screen for the Image Optimization...........4-7 Setting the Trigger Options...............................4-8 Settings for the Trigger Options.....................4-8 Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-10 Auto Brightness Adjustment............................4-11 Focus Adjustment...........................................4-12 Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type.................................4-12 Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type.............................4-14 Extended functions for the Image Optimization...................................4-16 Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization................................4-16 Imaging Area...............................................4-17 Advanced Brightness Adjustment................4-18 Lighting........................................................4-18 Color Filters (color type only).......................4-19 Digital Zoom (monochrome type only).........4-19 2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)............................4-20 Main screen for the Master Registration.........4-20

ing the master image.........................4-21 Extended functions for the Master Registration...................................4-22 Items of extended functions for the Master Registration...............................4-22 Master image registration from the image history in the sensor....................4-22 ing from the image in the USB memory.........................................4-24 When using a batch backup file „„ (*.iva)...................................................4-24 When using an image capture file „„ (*.ivp)...................................................4-25 Brightness correction...................................4-26 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28 Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose........................................4-28 Types of tools..................................................4-28 Main screen for the Tool Settings....................4-30 Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool.........................4-31 Adding a tool................................................4-31 Editing a tool................................................4-31 Deleting a tool..............................................4-31 Outline tool......................................................4-32 Setting items for the Outline tool.................4-32 Setting the Outline tool................................4-33 Setting a search region........................4-35 „„ Settings for disabling outlines..............4-35 „„ Setting a sensitivity..............................4-36 „„ Extended functions for the Outline tool........4-37 Rotation Range....................................4-38 „„ Search Algorithm.................................4-38 „„ Tool Name............................................4-39 „„ Color Area/Area tool........................................4-40 Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool....4-40 Setting the Color Area/Area tool..................4-42 Mask settings.......................................4-45 „„ Setting the upper limit..........................4-46 „„ Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool..............................4-48 Advanced Color Extraction/ „„ Advanced Brightness Extraction..........4-49 Tool Name............................................4-49 „„ Fixed Reference Area..........................4-50 „„ Position Adjustment tool..................................4-51 Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool........................4-52 Setting the Position Adjustment tool............4-53 Setting a search region........................4-55 „„ Settings for disabling outlines..............4-55 „„ Setting a sensitivity..............................4-56 „„ Extended functions for the Position Adjustment tool........................4-57 Rotation Range....................................4-57 „„ Extended functions for the Tool settings.........4-58 Items of extended functions for the Tool settings...........................................4-58 Copy Tool.....................................................4-58


9

Contents

4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line).....4-60 Main screen for the Output Assignment..........4-60 Setting range of the Output Assignment.........4-60 Default value........................................4-60 „„ Setting the Output Assignment.......................4-61 Extended functions for the Output Assignment....................................4-62 Extended functions items for the Output Assignment................................4-62 Logic Settings......................................4-63 „„ Total Status Conditions........................4-65 „„ Display Method of Extended Functions Menus....4-66

Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting Starting an Operation...........................................5-2 Turning on the power and starting an operation.........................................5-2 Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation.........................................5-2 Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen....5-4 Menu Screen.....................................................5-4 Switching the display to the full-screen mode....5-5 Enlarging the image display..............................5-6 Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed...........................................................5-6 Selecting the tool from „„ the pull-down menu...............................5-6 Selecting the tool by tapping it on „„ the monitor.............................................5-6 Selecting a display method for tools.................5-7 Display methods for tools..............................5-7 For color type.........................................5-7 „„ For monochrome type............................5-8 „„ Displaying the statistical information...............5-10 Displaying the statistical information...........5-10 Hiding the statistical information..................5-11 Displaying the histogram.................................5-12 Displaying the histogram.............................5-12 Hiding the histogram....................................5-13 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14 Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15 Using the images taken in „„ the Test mode......................................5-15 Using the image history saved in „„ the sensor............................................5-15 Using the image files saved in „„ the USB memory.................................5-15 Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-16 Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning.....5-16 ing the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning..................................5-18 ing the images taken in the Test mode..............................................5-18 ing the images from the image history saved in the sensor.........5-20 10

ing the images from the file saved in the USB memory...............5-22 Confirming or deleting the images ed for the Tool Auto Tuning.................5-25 Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information...............5-26 Tool Auto Tuning by the registration information file........................5-28 Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-32 Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target....................5-32 Imaging the target widely.............................5-32 Adjusting the installed distance (WD)....5-32 „„ Using the digital zooming function.......5-32 „„ Correcting the distorted images due to the installation..............................................5-33 Achieving adequate image brightness.........5-33 If the brightness cannot be adjusted „„ in the Auto Brightness Adjustment.......5-33 If the brightness cannot be adjusted „„ due to uneven brightness....................5-33 Achieving good focus..................................5-34 If good focus cannot be achieved by „„ the Auto Focus Adjustment..................5-34 Reducing the image blur..............................5-34 Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface...............................................5-35 Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment....5-35 „„ Using the dome attachment.................5-35 „„ Using the polarizing filter attachment....5-35 „„ Installing the sensor at an angle..........5-35 „„ Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)....5-36 Reducing the effect of illumination variation....................................5-36 Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position.........................5-36 Tool settings.........................................5-36 „„ Processing during an operation...........5-36 „„ Stabilizing the position adjustment..................5-37 Basic adjustments................................5-37 „„ If the target tilts and the position „„ adjustment becomes unstable.............5-37 If the position adjustment becomes „„ unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines..........................5-37 If the outline of the reference target „„ cannot be detected..............................5-38 Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-38 Basic adjustments................................5-38 „„ If the outline cannot be detected „„ when the target becomes out of position......................................5-38 If the detection becomes unstable „„ due to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target.................5-38 If the target tilts and the outline „„ cannot be detected..............................5-39 If the match rate difference „„ between the high and low-quality-targets is small...................5-39


Contents

If the outline of the target cannot „„

be detected..........................................5-39 Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool................5-39 Basic adjustments................................5-39 „„ If the color you wish to judge cannot „„ be extracted.........................................5-39 If the area search becomes „„ unstable due to unwanted colors being extracted....................................5-39 Shortening the Processing Time........................5-40 For the processing time..................................5-40 Flow of the internal process.................5-40 „„ Shortening the imaging processing time.........5-41 Selecting the tool............................................5-41 Shortening the processing time of each tool...5-41 Shortening the processing time of the Outline tool............................................5-41 Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool..............................5-42 Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment................................5-42

Chapter 6 Useful Features/Various Functions List of the Useful Features...................................6-2 Useful features while running............................6-2 Useful features during installation/adjustment....6-4 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-7 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-8 Overview of the program functions...................6-8 Things can be performed with the program functions.......................................6-8 Preparing the program functions.......................6-9 Preparation flow.............................................6-9 Preparation procedures.................................6-9 Using the program functions (changing over)...............................................6-10 When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in the Program Switch Method........................6-10 When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method........................6-11 Editing a program name..................................6-12 Copying a program.........................................6-12 Initializing a program.......................................6-13 Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG).............6-14 Displaying the Sensor Image History screen....6-14 Displaying from the run screen............6-14 „„ Displaying from „„ the Sensor Setup Menu screen...........6-14 Loading and confirming the saved images.....6-15 Clearing the saved images.............................6-16 Changing the logging conditions of the image history.............................................6-17 Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory...................................................6-18 Installing/Removing the USB memory............6-18 Installing the USB memory..........................6-18 Removing the USB memory........................6-18

Displaying the USB Memory screen...............6-18 Displaying from the run screen............6-18 „„ Displaying from „„ the Sensor Setup Menu screen...........6-18 Saving the sensor settings or the image history.............................................6-19 Backing up in a batch..................................6-19 Saving the image history individually...........6-20 Transferring the settings backed up in the USB memory to the sensor.......................6-21 Capturing the monitor screen and saving to the USB memory.............................6-23 Enabling the screen capturing function.......6-23 Capturing the screen...................................6-23 Folder composition and file naming rules.......6-24 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor....6-25 Sensor advanced settings...............................6-25 Environmental..............................................6-25 Setup Adjustment........................................6-25 Program.......................................................6-25 System.........................................................6-25 I/O Settings.....................................................6-26 Input Settings...............................................6-26 Output Settings............................................6-27 Polarity.........................................................6-28 I/O Monitor...................................................6-28 Device settings................................................6-29 Device Name...............................................6-29 Lock............................................6-30 Network Settings.............................................6-31 Advanced Network Settings............................6-32 FTP..............................................................6-32 FTP Destination Settings.....................6-33 „„ Transfer Condition Settings.................6-34 „„ Transfer Destination Folder Settings....6-35 „„ Field Network...............................................6-37 Tilt Correction..................................................6-38 Rotate 180°.....................................................6-40 White Balance (for color type only).................6-41 Program Switch Method..................................6-42 Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only)......................................6-42 Sensor Information..........................................6-43 Initializing the sensor......................................6-44 Updating the sensor........................................6-44 Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-45 Monitor Settings..............................................6-45 Sensor Connect...........................................6-45 Monitor Device Settings...............................6-45 Monitor Environment...................................6-45 System.........................................................6-45 Sensor Connect..............................................6-46 When directly connecting with the sensor...6-46 When connecting with the sensor via a network...............................................6-46 Network Settings.............................................6-48 Display Settings..............................................6-49 Touch Screen Lock.........................................6-50 Language........................................................6-51 Time................................................................6-51


11

Contents

Backlight.........................................................6-52 Touch Calibration..................................6-52 Monitor Information.........................................6-53 Initialize Monitor..............................................6-53 Update Monitor...............................................6-53

Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2 External trigger..................................................7-2 Internal trigger...................................................7-3 Operating in the shortest cycle......................7-3 Importing the Status Output.................................7-4 Importing the total status / total status NG output.......................................7-4 Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic.................................7-5 Changing the timing of the status output..........7-6 Cancelling One-Shot output..........................7-6 Changing Over.....................................................7-7 ing the Master Image..............................7-8 Clearing Errors...................................................7-10 Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on...........................................................7-11 Input Response Time.........................................7-12 Response time for the switch program input.............................................................7-12 Response time for the external master registration input..........................................7-12 Response time for the error clear input.......7-12 Description for symbols...............................7-12

Chapter 8 Specifications Specifications.......................................................8-2 Sensor...............................................................8-2 Intelligent Monitor..............................................8-4 Dimensions...........................................................8-6 Sensor...............................................................8-6 Optional parts for the sensor.............................8-7 Dome attachment..........................................8-7 Polarizing filter attachment............................8-8 Power I/O cable.............................................8-8 Mounting adapter...........................................8-8 Front cover....................................................8-8 Bracket..........................................................8-9 Intelligent Monitor............................................8-10 Optional parts for the monitor.........................8-12 Monitor power cable....................................8-12 Protection sheet...........................................8-12 Stylus...........................................................8-12 Wall mounting adapter.................................8-12 mounting adapter..............................8-12 DIN mounting adapter.................................8-12 Connection Cable...........................................8-13 Monitor cable...............................................8-13 Ethernet cable.............................................8-13

12

Appendices Status Table......................................................... A-2 Status table...................................................... A-2 Displaying and outputting the status result...... A-4 Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment.................... A-4 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5 Matching rate at the time of protrusion............ A-5 Cut-off process of the matching rate................ A-5 Settings List......................................................... A-6 RUN screen (menu display OFF)..................... A-6 RUN screen (menu display ON)...................... A-6 Sensor Setup Menu screen............................. A-7 Monitor Settings screen................................... A-9 Sensor Advanced screen............................... A-11 Sensor Setup screen..................................... A-14 1. Image Optimization................................. A-14 2. Master Registration................................ A-15 3. Tool Settings........................................... A-15 4. Output Assignment................................. A-18 Troubleshooting................................................. A-19 Error Messages................................................. A-22 Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor.... A-22 Confirming error messages of the monitor..... A-24 Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor.......................... A-28 Remedy when direct connection is unavailable..................................................... A-28 Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable................................. A-29 Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor...................... A-32 LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light......... A-32 STATUS indicator light................................ A-33 Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor..... A-34 Other methods of confirming a network connection...................................................... A-35 Confirming the existence of the sensor from the monitor........................ A-35 If the displayed confirmation „„ result is “NG”....................................... A-35 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor.................................................. A-36 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor................................................... A-37 Confirming the router settings.................... A-37 Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable...................................... A-38 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-40 Settings after initialization.............................. A-40 Connecting method after initialization............ A-40 For direct connection.......................... A-40 „„ For network connection...................... A-40 „„ Initializing the network settings...................... A-40


Contents

Maintenance...................................................... A-41 Attaching the protection sheet....................... A-41 Replacing the front cover............................... A-41 Index.................................................................. A-42


13

Contents

MEMO

14


1

System Configuration........................................1-2 Overview of IV Series.........................................1-4 Checking the Package Contents.......................1-8 Name and Function of Each Part....................1-13


1-1

1 Getting Started

Getting Started

This chapter explains the system configurations and overview of IV Series, how to check package contents, and the name and function of each part.

System Configuration

System Configuration 1

Basic configurations of IV Series

Getting Started

Connecting the monitor and single sensor IV Series Simulator (IV-Navigator)

Intelligent Monitor IV-M30

IVP-Converter

Monitor power cable (2m/5m/10m)

Monitor cable (2m/5m/10m/20m) Eth

ern

Sensor IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

et

co

mm

un

USB memory

ica

tio n

Power I/O cable (2m/5m/10m) (Optional) Dome attachment IV-D10 Polarizing filter attachment OP-87436/OP-87437 DC24V power

Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer etc. proximity sensor etc. Alarm can be output by the Sends the signal to the trigger status output function. input when the target is detected.

1-2

PLC PLC can control the trigger input and the status output function, and can switch the program number.


System Configuration

1

Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors

Ethernet switch

Ethernet cable (2m/5m/10m)


1-3

Getting Started

When the network is connected, the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) can be connected by selecting a single sensor from among multiple sensors. * Each sensor requires the power I/O cable. * IV-M30 requires the power cable. * A single monitor cannot be connected with multiple sensors at the same time.

Overview of IV Series

Overview of IV Series 1

IV Series

Getting Started

The IV Series is an all-in-one “Vision Sensor” featuring a camera, a light, and a controller. This sensor can be attached easily so complicated detection operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a photoelectric switch can be achieved easily. Operation condition settings require the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software IV-Navigator (IV-H1). After setting is completed, the sensor can be operated independently. The sensor with monitor and the sensor with PC are connected via an Ethernet so network connection with multiple sensors besides direct single connection can be performed.

Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) Direct connection zz

Power I/O

Network connection zz

Functions of monitor yySetting the sensor yyMonitoring the operation screen yyMonitoring the statistical information yyReading the image history

Functions of sensor yyCamera yyLight yyImage detection yyI/O yySaving the image history

1-4


Ethernet switch


1

Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

Getting Started

The IV-Navigator has the same functions as the intelligent monitor (IV-M30). For details of operations using the IV-Navigator, refer to “IV Series 's Manual (PC Software)”.

Direct connection zz

Network connection zz

Functions of IV-Navigator yySetting the sensor yyMonitoring the operation screen yyMonitoring the statistical information yyReading the image history yySimulator Power I/O Ethernet switch Functions of sensor yyCamera yyLight yyImage detection yyI/O yySaving the image history


1-5


1

Judgment processing flow

Getting Started

This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device. Trigger input BUSY output Total status output

Trigger input

Imaging

Tool processing

Status output

Save images

1-6

Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the target position from a photoelectric switch or PLC. Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with an internal trigger function.

Light up the built-in light and image the target by using the CMOS image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.

According to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target is scanned for detecting whether a target is high or low quality. Up to 16 detection tools can be set. Also, misaligned positions of the target can be corrected by using the position adjustment tool. After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output function turns OFF. Outputs the status results. When the total status result is OK, the total status output is ON. When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output is ON.

Saves the image to the image history memory in the sensor. Conditions for saving the image can be selected from “NG only” or “All”. Color type can save 100 images, and monochrome type can save 300 images.



MEMO

1 Getting Started


1-7

Checking the Package Contents

Checking the Package Contents 1 Getting Started

IV Series are constructed by each following model. Check that all the following packed items are packed for each model you purchased before using.

Sensor yyIV-500C yyIV-500CA

yyIV-150M yyIV-150MA



Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1

Mounting adapter x 1 Screw for mounting adapter x 1

Flathead screwdriver x 1 (Manual focus type only)

Sensor x 1 The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the default factory setting.

Instruction Manual x 1

“Name and Function of Each Part” (Page 1-13) “Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2) “Cables” (Page 2-12)

Optional parts for the sensor Dome attachment yyIV-D10

Instruction Manual x 1 Mounting screw x 2

Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1

Dome attachment x 1 “Using the dome attachment” (Page 2-6)

Polarized visible light filter attachment

Infrared polarization filter attachment

yyOP-87436

yyOP-87437 Mounting screw x 2

Mounting screw x 2



Polarized visible light filter attachment x 1

Infrared polarization filter attachment x 1

“Using the polarizing filter attachment” (Page 2-7)

“Using the polarizing filter attachment” (Page 2-7)

1-8



Front cover (for replacement)

yyOP-87440 (2m) yyOP-87441 (5m) yyOP-87442 (10m)

yyOP-87461

1 Getting Started

Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)

Mounting screw x 2

Front cover (for replacement) x 1

O-shaped ring (Small x 2, Large x 1)

Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1

Mounting adapter

Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1

yyOP-87460

Instruction Manual x 1 Screw for the mounting adapter x 1

Mounting adapter x 1 Same as accessories for the sensor. Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

Optional parts for replacement. “Replacing the front cover” (Page A-41)

Bracket yyOP-87685

Bracket A x 1

Screw for the bracket and nut x 1 Mounting screw x 4

Bracket B x 1


1-9


1

Intelligent Monitor

Getting Started

yyIV-M30

Stylus x 1 String for hanging the stylus x 1 Monitor x 1

Wall mounting adapter x 1 Screw for the adapter x 2 Hexagon nut x 2 Instruction Manual x 1 Starting Guide x 1

“Name and Function of Each Part” (Page 1-13) “Mounting the Monitor” (Page 2-8) “Cables” (Page 2-12)

Optional parts for the monitor Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)

USB memory (1GB) yyOP-87502


USB memory x 1

Stylus yyOP-87462

Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)

String for hanging the stylus x 1

Protection sheet yyOP-87463

Stylus x 1 Same as accessories for monitors. Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

Protection sheet x 1 “Attaching the protection sheet” (Page A-41)

1-10



1

Wall mounting adapter

Getting Started

yyOP-87464

Screw for the adapter x 2 Hexagon nut x 2 Wall mounting adapter x 1 Same as accessories for monitors. Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

mounting adapter yyOP-87465

Mounting screw (lateral) x 2 Mounting screw (front) x 4

mounting adapter x 1 “Mounting to a ” (Page 2-10)

DIN mounting adapter yyOP-87466 Mounting screw (lateral) x 2

DIN mounting adapter x 1 “Mounting to the DIN rail” (Page 2-11)


1-11


1

Communication Cable

Getting Started

Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)

yyOP-87450 (2m) yyOP-87451 (5m) yyOP-87452 (10m) yyOP-87453 (20m)


Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin) x 1

1-12

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1


Name and Function of Each Part

Name and Function of Each Part Sensor sensor

1 2 3 4

5

2 Connector for power I/O cable Connector for connecting the power I/O cable. Use this for supplying the power to the sensor and for connecting with external devices. “Cables” (Page 2-12) 3 Focusing position adjustment screw (manual focus type only) Adjusts the focus of the displayed image. “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12) 4 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cable Connector for connecting a monitor cable or Ethernet cable. Use this for connecting the monitor, PC, or Ethernet switch. “Cables” (Page 2-12)

6

7 8

When the cable is not connected, attach the waterproof cap for Ethernet connector to maintain enclosure rating. Tightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 N·m 5 Indicator light Indicates the operating status of the sensor. “Operation of the indicator light” (Page 1-14) 6 Built-in light LED light that illuminates the target 7 Camera Images the object. 8 Front cover Protects the camera and built-in lights. The front cover is protected by the protection sheet (blue) in the default factory setting. Remove the sheet when the sensor is to be used. Front cover for replacement is provided for maintenance. “Replacing the front cover” (Page A-41)


1-13

1 Getting Started

Name and function of each part of the „„

1 Mounting adapter Use this for mounting and fixing the sensor. “Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)


1

Operation of the indicator light „„

Getting Started

Details on operations of the indicator light are shown below. 4

5

1 2 3 1 PWR/ERR Indicates the power supplying status to the sensor and the error status of the sensor. yyGreen (ON).......Operating. yyGreen (Blink).....Setting processing. Operation is stopped. Blinks once a second. yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has occurred. yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has occurred. yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied. Adjusting the focusing position (manual focus only). For countermeasures when an error occurred, refer to “Error Messages” (Page A-22). 2 OUT Indicates the comprehensive result. yyGreen................Comprehensive result is “OK”. yyRed...................Comprehensive result is “NG”. yy(OFF)................Setting processing. Standby status until the first judge finishes after starting the operation or after switching the program number. yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status while adjusting the focusing position with the blinking speed (manual focus type only). “Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type” (Page 4-14) 1-14

3 TRIG Green light lights up (one-shot) according to input of the internal or external trigger. 4 STATUS Indicates the connection status within the monitor. yyGreen (ON).......Normally connected with monitor. yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved but the sensor is not correctly connected with monitor. yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned. Sensor is not correctly connected with monitor. yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status while adjusting the focusing position with the blinking speed (manual focus type only). “Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type” (Page 4-14) When the sensor cannot correctly connect with the monitor, refer to “Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor” (Page A-28). 5 LINK/ACT Indicates the linking status within monitor or Ethernet switch. yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked. yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data is sending/receiving. yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.



Monitor

4 5 6 7

8 1

2

9

10

1 Power connector Connects the monitor power cable. “Cables” (Page 2-12) 2 Connector for the monitor cable/Ethernet cable Connector for connecting the monitor cable or Ethernet cable. Used when connecting with the sensor or Ethernet switch. “Cables” (Page 2-12) 3 Unlock button Push this button when dismounting the monitor from the wall mounting adapter or DIN mounting adapter. “Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter” (Page 2-9) “Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter” (Page 2-11)

For countermeasures when an error occurred, “Error Messages” (Page A-22). refer to 5 Indicator light (SENSOR) Indicates the connecting status to the sensor. yyGreen (ON).......Connected normally to the sensor. ....Linked normally but it is not yyGreen (Slowly blinks) properly connected to the sensor. yy(OFF)................It is not properly connected because it did not link normally. If the monitor cannot correctly connect with the “Remedy when the Monitor sensor, refer to cannot be Connected with the Sensor” (Page A-28). 6 LCD monitor/Stylus Displays the operation screen and setup screen. Operates by touching the screen with the stylus. 7 USB connecting connector Connector for connecting the USB memory. Connector is protected by the cover. “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory” (Page 6-18) 8 Stylus Used to operate the touch-screen. 9 Stylus holder Stores the stylus. 10 Strap holder Holds the strap or hangs the stylus.


1-15

1 Getting Started

3

4 Indicator light (PWR) Indicates the operating status of the monitor. yyGreen (ON).......The power is turned ON. yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error occurred to the sensor or monitor. yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error occurred to the sensor or monitor. (OFF)................ y The power is turned OFF. y


MEMO

1 Getting Started 1-16


2

Mounting the Sensor..........................................2-2 Mounting the Monitor.........................................2-8 Cables................................................................2-12


2-1

2 Installation and Connection


This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and monitor, and explains connection procedures.

Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the Sensor


yyGround (functional ground) the drain cable (FG) of the power I/O cable. yyMount and insulate the sensor. Use the attached mounting adapter to insulate. Sensor case has been grounded. If the sensor is not insulated, the electric potential and noises may cause a damage or malfunction. yyDo not place the sensor in the environment that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance to the environment, or environment that propagates the vibration directly to the sensor. Those may cause a damage or malfunction.

Checking the view and installed distance For IV Series, installed distance between the view and object is different depending on the type of the sensor. Check the type of the sensor to be used and its view, and place it in the proper distance. View H

yyManual focus type needs to adjust the focusing position after installed. Reserve the enough space to adjust and install it. yyAt the time of installation, it is better to enable the position or direction adjustment of the sensor by installing the adjustment system at the sensor mounting area. yyView and optical axis have individual differences. Adjust the position by checking the actual image at the time of installation. yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also, be careful when the light intensity of the ambient light changes. Use the shield to protect when the location cannot be changed. yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out the internal light or the view of the sensor. yyDetection may become unstable due to the lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each other. Delay the timing of external trigger or use the shield to avoid interference.

2-2

View V

Indicator light


Installed distance WD View V = View H x 0.75 (H : V = 4 : 3)

The indicator light of the sensor side is the front surface of an image.

Mounting the Sensor

Standard range type (color/monochrome) zz

2

500


Installed distance WD (mm)

600

400 300 200 150 100 50 0

25

50 70

100 130 150

200 210

250

View H (mm)

Installed distance WD (mm)

Short range type zz 150

100

50

0

10 12

20

30

36

40

View H (mm)

Long range type zz Installed distance WD (mm)

2500 2000 1500 1000 500 300 0

45

100

200

300

400

View H (mm)

The value of View H and V will be a half of the value on the figures above when using the digital zooming function (monochrome type only).


2-3

Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the sensor

2

Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter

Mounting the mounting adapter


Use the mounting adapter (accessory or OP-87460) to mount the sensor. The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the default factory setting. Remove it from the sensor. “Unmounting the sensor” (Page 2-5)

Mounting on the wall „„ yyScrew : M3 x 4 Use the commercially available screws which have head thickness of 3 mm or lower. yyTightening torque : 1.0 N·m or lower

Mounting from the jig side „„ yyScrew : M4 x 4 Use the commercially available screws. yyTightening torque : 1.5 N·m or lower

1 Mount the sensor to the left and right stopper on the mounting adapter.

Sensors cannot be mounted on the side with the indicator light. Indicator light

Push the sensor to the stopper of the fixing screw

Push until you hear the clicking sound from the both side stoppers

2 Fix the mounting adapter and sensor using the attached screws.

yyScrew : M3 x 1 Use the attached screws. yyTightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 N·m

For details on mounting hole dimensions, refer to “Dimensions” (Page 8-6). Remove the protection sheet

2-4


Mounting the Sensor

Unmounting the sensor

2

1 Dismount the screw.


2 Pull out the stopper of the mounting adapter and unmount the sensor.

Pull out the stopper


2-5

Mounting the Sensor

2 Fix the dome attachment with attached

Mounting the attachment Using the dome attachment

yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor. yyUse the dome attachment at a correct installation distance. Failure to do so may lose the effect of the dome attachment. yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment mounted. “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with the dome attachment mounted. “White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-41)

Mounting the dome attachment „„

1 Mount the attachment by aligning the

concave part of the dome attachment with the mounting screw of the front cover of the sensor.

Front cover mounting screw

Concave part

2-6

Screw hole for mounting the attachment

Installed distance of the dome „„ attachment

62 to 112 mm from the front face of the sensor (0 to 50 mm from the front face of the dome attachment) Sensor type yyStandard range type yyShort range type Installed distance from the front face of the sensor

Concave part

62 to 112 mm


Dome attachment can be used for the standard range type and short range type sensor.

yyScrew : Dedicated screw x 2 Use the attached dedicated screws. yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

(0 to 50 mm)

2

dedicated screws.


Target

Mounting the Sensor

Using the polarizing filter attachment

the attached dedicated screws.

2

yyScrew : M2.5 x 2 Use the attached dedicated screws. yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

Remove the protection sheet (blue)

1 Mount the attachment by aligning the

concave part of the polarizing filter attachment with the mounting screw of the front cover of the sensor.

Front cover mounting screw

Screw hole for mounting the attachment Concave part

Concave part


2-7


yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor. yyThere are the polarized visible light filter attachment (OP-87436) and the infrared polarization filter attachment (OP-87437). Use the correct polarization filter attachment in accordance with the illuminant of the sensor light. Failure to do so may lose the effect. yyAdjust the brightness with the polarization filter attachment mounted. “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with the polarization filter attachment mounted. “White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-41)

2 Fix the polarizing filter attachment with

Mounting the Monitor

Mounting the Monitor Mounting to a wall


Use the wall mounting adapter (accessories or OP87464). Hang it on the hook with the wall mounting adapter mounted to the monitor, or mount the monitor to the wall mounting adapter mounted on the wall.

Hanging on the hook For operation take the monitor from the hook and operate it while holding it in your hands.

1 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting

adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall mounting adapter to the groove on the rear monitor.

Mounting with the wall mounting adapter The monitor can be operated by the following methods. yyUnhang to pick up the monitor from the hook and operate it. yyOperate it while mounted on the wall.

1 Mount the wall mounting adapter to the wall.

Mounting by creating a screw hole in the wall zz yyScrew : M3 x 2 Use commercially available screws. yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 N·m

Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm that the monitor is locked.

Mounting by creating a plated through zz hole on the

yyScrew : M3 x 2, Nut : M3 x 2 Use the attached screws and nuts. yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 N·m Stopper

2 Hang the monitor on the hook.

2-8



2 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting

adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall mounting adapter to the groove on the rear monitor.

Unlock the monitor from the wall mounting adapter by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.

Unlock

Stopper


2-9


Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm that the monitor is locked.

Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter


3 Mount the monitor with the adapter

Mounting to a

mounted to the control board from the rear side, and fix it with the screws.

Mounting to a

1 Connect the power cable and monitor cable to the monitor.

“Cables” (Page 2-12)

2 Mount the adapter to the monitor and fix it with the attached screws.

Strap holder

yyScrew : M3, 11 mm long, with 2 washers Use the attached screws. yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 N·m

Stylus can be hung from the strap holder using the hanging string (accessory).

cutting dimension ( cutting square hole dimension)

100

110 (Circular hole position for screw)

2-10

4-φ3.5


(Circular hole position for screw)

111 +1 -0

92 +1 -0


yyMountable board thickness : 1 to 4 mm yyScrew : M3, 7 mm long, with 4 washers Use the attached screws. yyTightening torque : 0.5 N·m or lower

( cutting square hole dimension)

2

Operate the monitor by mounting it to the side such as a control board. Mount the adapter (OP-87465) to the monitor, and mount it to the .


2 Adjust the position of the DIN mounting

Mounting to the DIN rail

adapter and the DIN rail by pulling down the stopper of the adapter, and then push up the stopper to lock it.

Mounting using DIN mounting adapter

1 Mount the monitor to the DIN mounting adapter.

Slide the monitor until the end of the stopper, and confirm that the monitor is locked.

Stopper

Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter Unlock the monitor from the DIN mounting adapter by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.

Unlock

Stopper

Fixing to the DIN mounting adapter zz To fix the monitor to the DIN mounting adapter, use the attached screws. yyScrew : M3 x 2 Use the attached flat head screw. yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 N·m



Mount the DIN mounting adapter (OP-87466) to the monitor, and mount it to the DIN rail. The monitor can be operated by the following methods. yyPick up the monitor from the DIN mounting adapter and operate it. yyOperate it while mounted on the DIN rail.

2-11

Cables

Cables

2

Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor


1 Adjust the pins of the connector for the

power I/O cable and pin connection of the cable connector, and connect the cable to the sensor.

3 Wire each cable according to its intended purpose.

Selecting NPN output zz When NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11) External device Brown (DC24V) Black/White/ Gray/Orange (OUT) Pink/Yellow/ Light Blue/Purple/ Green/Red (IN)

Adjust the pins and the pin connection

Load IN DC24V OUT (NPN)

Blue (0V) Drain wire (FG)

2 Tighten the connector by turning the screwon connector in the clockwise direction.

Tightening torque of the screws needs to be 1.0 to 1.5 N·m.

yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) Use it by asg the optional function to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.

Selecting PNP output zz

When PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11) Brown (DC24V) Pink/Yellow/ Light Blue/Purple/ Green/Red (IN) Black/White/ Gray/Orange (OUT) Blue (0V)

When connecting the connector, insert it without tipping and tighten it well. If the tightening is weak, vibration can loosen the connector and cause bad connections. Also, the enclosure rating may not be maintained with loose connection. * Indication is retighten approximately 90° to 120° with tools such as pliers after tightening with hands.

2-12

External device

(PNP) OUT DC24V IN Load

Drain wire (FG)

yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) Use it by asg the optional function to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.


Cables

Wiring color

Name

Asg default value

Brown

DC24V

-

+ side of power

Blue

0V

-

- side of power GND of input-output cable

Black

OUT1

Total Status (N.O.)

White

OUT2

BUSY (N.O.)

Gray

OUT3

Error (N.O.)

Orange

OUT4

OFF

Pink

IN1

External trigger ↑

Yellow

IN2

OFF

Light Blue

IN3

OFF

Purple

IN4

OFF

Green

IN5

OFF

Red

IN6

OFF

Drain

FG

-

Description


Output assignable function yyTotal Status yyTot. StatusNG yyRUN yyBUSY yyError yyPos. Adj. yyJudge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16) yyLogical operation result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 4) yyOFF (not used) Set external trigger. Rising timing (↑) or falling timing (↓) can be set. Input assignable function yyProgram bit0 to bit4 yyClear Error yyExt. Master Save yyOFF (not used) Insulated frame

Cable specification yyBrown/Blue/Black/White/Gray/Orange : AWG25 yyPink/Yellow/Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red : AWG28 yyWith braided shield cable (with drain cable) yyThe output cable assignment can be changed. “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60) yyN.O./N.C. can be changed. “Output Settings” (Page 6-27) yyThe input cable assignment can be changed. “Input Settings” (Page 6-26)

yyIndividually insulate the non-used input-output cables. yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non- output (transistor output/SSR output). For output (relay output), incorrect input may be operated due to the bouncing.


2-13

Cables

2

Specification of I/O circuit and current of the sensor

No-voltage input (When the NPN „„ output is selected)

+3.3V

Brown

DC24V

Brown

Main circuit

0V

Blue * Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) Use by asg the optional functions to IN2 to 6

Voltage input (When the PNP output is „„ selected)

When the PNP output is selected „„ When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11), the circuit becomes open collector PNP output circuit. yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower DC24V

Brown

*

Main circuit

0V

Blue

IN1 - IN6

*

0V

* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) Use by asg the optional functions to OUT1 to OUT4

Blue * Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) Use by asg the optional functions to IN2 to 6

2-14

OUT1 - OUT4

Load

Brown

* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) Use by asg the optional functions to OUT1 to OUT4

Overcurrent protection circuit

DC24V

Blue

Main circuit

When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11), the circuit becomes voltage input circuit. yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V : 15 V or higher yyON voltage : 2 mA (for 24V) yyON current : 0.2 mA or lower yyOFF current

OUT1 - OUT4

*

0V

IN1 - IN6

*

Load

DC24V

When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11), the circuit becomes open collector NPN output circuit. yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower

Overcurrent protection circuit

When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11), the circuit becomes no-voltage input circuit. External power supply is not necessary. : 2 V or lower yyON voltage : 0.1 mA or lower yyOFF current : 2 mA (short circuit) yyON current

When the NPN output is selected „„

Main circuit


Input circuit

Output circuit


Cables

Connecting the power cable of the monitor

2

Align the arrow mark of the power cable and the direction of the front monitor, and connect the cable to the monitor.


1

3 Wire to the power supply.

Brown (DC24V) Monitor power cable (2m/5m/10m)

Blue (0V)

DC24V

Cable specification Brown/Blue : AWG24

Arrow mark

2 Turn the screw-on connector in the clockwise direction to tighten it.


2-15

Cables

2

Connecting the sensor and the monitor


Connecting directly Connect the sensor and monitor using the monitor cable.

Connecting via network Connect each Ethernet cable to the monitor and sensor. Connect the other side of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet switch.

Ethernet switch

Monitor cable (2m/5m/10m/20m)

Ethernet cable (2m/5m/10m)

For details on connecting the monitor cable, refer to “Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable” (Page 2-17).

For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer to “Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable” (Page 2-17).

The sensor and monitor do not PoE (Power over Ethernet). Supply power using the power cable.

2-16


Cables

Connecting the monitor cable/ Ethernet cable

1 Align the pin connection parts of the

monitor cable/Ethernet cable connector with three pins of the cable connector, and connect the cable to the sensor.

Align the pins and the pin connection

If the connector cable tightening is weak, vibration may loosen the connector and cause bad connections or cable disconnections. Also, the enclosure rating may not be maintained with loose connection. Properly follow the procedures above and tighten the connector completely. Check the spaces between the monitor cable/ Ethernet cable and the cable connector.

For sensors zz * Same procedures for monitors.

Spaces between connectors

2 Tighten the connector by turning the

For monitors zz

screw-on connector in the clockwise direction. When connecting the connector, insert it without inclination while pushing in and tighten it well. (2) When the screw stops rotating by the locking mechanism, further tighten it while pushing. (1) Tighten the screw-on connector

Spaces between connectors

* Same procedures for monitors.


2-17


This section describes the details on connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable using the example of connecting the monitor cable to the sensor.

Repeat the steps (1) and (2) and when you cannot tighten the screw by hand any more, use a tool such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces between connectors are shown below. yyMonitor cable/Ethernet cable (OP-87450/OP-87451/OP-87452/OP-87453/ OP-87457/OP-87458/OP-87459) Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 N·m Retightening degree : 5 to 10° Spaces between connectors (reference value) For sensors : 0 mm For monitors : 2.2 mm

Cables

MEMO

2 Installation and Connection 2-18


3

Basic Operation

Overview of Screen and Operation...................3-2 Basic Operation Flow.........................................3-4 Operation when the Power is Turned on..........3-5 Setting to the Factory Default.........................3-12 Basic Operation for the Monitor......................3-14


3-1

3 Basic Operation

This chapter explains the contents of the monitor display and operation of the IV Series, basic operation flow, and operation when turning on the power for the first time. It also explains procedures to restore the sensor and monitor to the default factory settings and basic operation of monitor.

Overview of Screen and Operation

Overview of Screen and Operation This section explains monitor displays and operation. For details of what can be set on each screen and its operation, see to the applicable references. Run screen

3 Basic Operation

Images and judges based on the judgment condition. “Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)

Full-screen display/Zooming Use the [Zoom] button to enlarge the view of the monitor “Switching the display to the full-screen mode” (Page 5-5) “Enlarging the image display” (Page 5-6)

Switching ON/OFF of the menu display

Tool display Select the display patterns of tools from OFF / Window / Process 1 / Process 2 “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)

A

B

Statistics display

Monitor Settings Sets each function of the monitor. “Setting the Advanced Monitor Information” (Page 6-45)

Displays statistical information of status on the monitor. “Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10)

Histogram display Displays histogram of status on the monitor. “Displaying the histogram” (Page 5-12)

3-2


Overview of Screen and Operation

Program list

Sets condition to judge a target. “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page 6-7)

Settings Navigator Sets the program to be used for judgment. “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)

A

B Limit Adjustment Adjusts the judgment threshold. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14)

Sensor Advanced Performs the sensor advanced settings. “Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor” (Page 6-25)

Tool Auto Tuning Automatically adjusts threshold of tool and extraction conditions of Color Area/Area tool in accordance with OK/NG image. “Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)

Sensor Image History

A

Operates the sensor image history. “Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-14)

USB Memory

B

Sets the operation when using USB memory. “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory” (Page 6-18)


3-3

3 Basic Operation

Checks or initializes the program. “Things can be performed with the program functions” (Page 6-8)

Sensor Setup Menu

Basic Operation Flow

Basic Operation Flow Mounting, connecting, and wiring the sensor and monitor Mount the sensor and monitor, and then connect and wire the cable. “Chapter 2 Installation and Connection” (Page 2-1)

3 Basic Operation

Turning on the power Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor, and then perform the initial startup setting. “Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-5)

Settings Navigator Create the program to be used for operation in [Settings Navigator] (Sensor Setup).

STEP 1: Setting of image optimization Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target. Set the trigger option, and adjust the brightness and imaging focus. “1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)

STEP 2: Registration of a master image Image the high-quality-target and the master image to serve as the reference of judgment. “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

STEP 3: Tool setting Set the tool to judge a target. Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set. “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)

STEP 4: Output assignment Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4). “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

Starting the operation/adjustment Switch the settings screen to the run screen, and start the operation. If the setting is inappropriate, adjust the thresholds and tool settings (Tool Auto Tuning). “Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

3-4


Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation when the Power is Turned on Operation flow when the power is turned on Turn on the power

Initial start-up of the monitor yyDirect Connection yyNetwork Connection

(2)

(4)

(5)

The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the (3) activation condition in Settings Navigator. After the setting is completed, operation begins. “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)

Initial start-up of the sensor (3)

Sensor settings menu

(2) When the power of the sensor is turned on for the first time, set the polarity. “Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-11)

Run

Connecting...

(4) After the second time of starting the monitor and sensor, the operation begins when the power is turned on. “Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1) (5) When the connection is failed, the process remains in the connecting screen. “Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor” (Page A-28) The sensor can be independently operated.


3-5

3 Basic Operation

(1)

(1) When the power of the monitor is turned on for the first time, set the display language, date and time, and the connection method with the sensor. For the connection method with the sensor, there are Direct Connection and Network Connection. “Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Direct Connection)” (Page 3-6) “Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Network Connection)” (Page 3-7)


Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Direct Connection)

3

1 Turn on the power of the monitor.

The screen to select the language opens.

Basic Operation

2 Select the language to be displayed on

5 Turn on the power of the sensor. Turn on the power of the sensor before the monitor is restarted by tapping the [OK] button in step 6.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

the monitor and tap the [OK] button.

The monitor restarts and connects to the sensor. [English] is selected in the default setting.

3 Set the current date and time, and tap the [OK] button.

yyMove to the item to be set by the [←] or [→] button and enter the numbers. yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the selected item.

4 Select the [Direct Connection] button and

yyWhen the monitor is connected with the sensor for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. For the details of procedures, refer to “Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-11). yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, the run screen opens. yyWhen the connection is unavailable with the frozen connection screen, refer to “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable” (Page A-28). yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is automatically set. yyIf the PC is directly connected with the sensor when the PROFINET function is being used, the PROFINET function will stop. To use the PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.

tap the [OK] button.

To use the FTP client function or field network, select the [Network Connection] button. The Complete Configuration screen opens. 3-6



Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Network Connection)

4 Select the [Network Connection] button and tap the [OK] button.

When connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.

3 Basic Operation

Setting the network address of the monitor

1 Turn on the power of the monitor.

The screen to select the language opens.

2 Select the language to be displayed on

The Complete Configuration screen opens.


the monitor and tap the [OK] button.

The Network Settings screen opens. [English] is selected in the default setting.

6 Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

3 Set the current date and time, and tap the [OK] button.

The screen to set each item opens. yyMove to the item to be set by the [←] or [→] button and enter the numbers. yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the selected item.

At the initial startup or initialization of the monitor, the monitor starts up with 192.168.10.1 as the IP address. If there is a device with the same IP address on the network, change the IP address before connecting the monitor to the network.


3-7


7 Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and

Default Gateway individually, and then tap the [OK] button. IP address

3 Basic Operation

The system returns to the network setup screen.


Searching for a sensor to be connected Automatically searches for a sensor on the network and connects with it. yyThe search time is about 10 seconds. yySearching range and retrievable number of units are as follows. yySensor with no IP address (default) : A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor reaches (Page A-40). yySensor with IP address : A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on the local network to which the monitor is connected.

1 Turn on the power of the sensor. 2 Tap the [Search Sensor] button. The monitor restarts. After restarted, the Sensor Connect screen opens.

Searching for sensor begins.

There are two ways to set the sensor to be connected. For details of procedures, refer to each reference.

When the sensor on the network is zz searched

“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-8)

When the sensor is specified by the IP zz address

When the searching is finished, the searched result will be displayed. If no sensor is found, refer to “When the connection cannot be established by searching for the sensor” (Page A-30).

“Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address” (Page 3-10)

3-8



When a sensor with no IP address is found zz

The confirmation dialog appears.

3

Empty

Tap the [Yes] button to copy the network settings of the monitor. When copying is completed, the information screen opens.

IP address

3 When multiple sensors are found, select

the sensor to be connected with the [<] or [>] button.

4 Connect to the sensor.

Tap the [OK] button. The sensor network setup screen opens.

When connecting to the sensor with no IP zz address

Tap the [Connect] button.

Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway, and set these items individually. The confirmation dialog appears.

When the monitor's IP address is copied, the sensor's and monitor's IP address will be duplicated. Make sure to change the IP address. IP address

Tap the [OK] button.


3-9

Basic Operation

When a sensor with an IP address is found zz


The system returns to the network setup screen for the sensor to be connected.

Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address Used when the IP address of the sensor to be connected is defined beforehand.

3 Basic Operation

1 Turn on the power of the sensor. 2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button. Tap the [Connect] button. yyWhen the monitor is connected with the sensor for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. For the details of procedures, refer to “Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-11). yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

3 Enter the IP address of the sensor to be

connected and tap the [Connect] button.

When connecting to the sensor with set IP zz address

Tap the [Connect] button.

The run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

The monitor connects to the selected sensor and the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

3-10

If the monitor cannot connect with the sensor, refer to “When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor” (Page A-31).



Operation for initial startup of the sensor When the monitor is connected to the sensor in the default setting, the screen to select the polarity (NPN or PNP) opens. After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in Settings Navigator. For details of the Polarity, refer to “Specification of I/O circuit and current of the sensor” (Page 2-14).

3 Basic Operation

1 Select the Polarity of the sensor and tap the [OK] button.

The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

2 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button and set up the program.

For details of the Settings Navigator, refer to “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1).


3-11

Setting to the Factory Default

Setting to the Factory Default 3 Tap the [System] button and then the

Initializing the sensor Initializes information set in the sensor and uses factory default setting.

3 Basic Operation

yyThe following settings will not be initialized. yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28) yyNetwork Settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask / Default Gateway / Port number (T)) (Page 6-31) yyTo initialize the ed programs individually, refer to “Initializing a program” (Page 6-13).

[Initialize Sensor] button.

4 Tap the [Go] button.

1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.


5 Tap the [OK] button. The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

2 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.

The Sensor Advanced screen opens.

3-12

Initialization begins. After initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen opens.


The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.


Setting to the Factory Default


Initializing the monitor Initializes information set in the monitor and uses factory default setting.

3

1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON and tap the [Monitor Settings] button.

Initialization begins. After initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen opens.


The Monitor Settings screen opens.

2 Tap the [System] button and then the [Initialize Monitor] button.

3 Tap the [Go] button.

The monitor restarts. After restarting, set the display language, date and time, and the connection method with the sensor. For the connection method with the sensor, there are Direct Connection and Network Connection. “Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Direct Connection)” (Page 3-6) “Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Network Connection)” (Page 3-7)



3-13

Basic Operation

The following settings will not be initialized. yyLanguage (Page 6-51) yyTime (Page 6-51)

Basic Operation for the Monitor

Basic Operation for the Monitor Editing the value with the slider

3

The value of a trigger interval and the threshold of each tool can be edited. This section explains how to edit the value with the slider using an example of a trigger interval in [Internal].

Setting by the [+] / [-] button zz By tapping the [+] / [-] button, the value of a trigger interval increases or decreases (slider slides in accordance with the value changed).

Basic Operation

1 In the Image Optimization settings of

The value is updated according to the slider position

the Settings Navigator, tap the [Internal] button in [Trigger Options]. The slider appears on the monitor. Tap the [+] / [-] button to slide the slider

For the slider which sets both upper and lower limit, select the slider to be set and tap the [+] / [-] button to set it.

2

Setting by inputting a value zz Set the trigger interval.

Setting by the slider zz Touch the slider, and then slide it to the right or left to set the trigger interval. According to the slider position, the value of a trigger interval is updated.

By tapping the ▼ button of the trigger interval, the screen to input a value opens. Input the value of a trigger interval and tap the [OK] button.

Tap the ▼ button

The value is updated according to the slider position Slide the slider to the right or left

Input the value of a trigger interval

yyBy tapping the reset to 0. yyBy tapping the can be deleted.

3-14


button, the value can be button, the last number


Changing the size of the tool window zz

Editing the tool window The tool window displayed when the tool is set in the Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or direction. This section explains how to edit the tool window using an example of [Outline] tool.

By touching either side of the tool window, will be displayed. The height or width of or the tool window can be changed by touching and dragging it.

Navigator, tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the [Outline] button. The tool window of the Outline tool will be displayed at the center of the monitor.

By touching one of the corners of the tool will be displayed. The size of the window, tool window can be changed by touching and dragging it.

Tool window

2 Set the tool window of the Outline tool.

Selecting the shape of the tool window zz On the screen to set the detection tool, the screen to select the shape of the tool window opens by tapping the [Window Shape ] button. [¨ Rect] or [¡ Circle] can be selected. ¨ Rect

When the [¡ Circle] is selected in the Window shape settings, the size of the circle can be changed by touching and dragging the outline of the circle.

¡ Circle

Changing the direction of the tool window zz By touching and dragging the arrow mark on the upper right of the tool window, the direction of the tool window can be changed.

Moving the tool window zz By tapping inside the tool window,

will be

displayed. Move the tool window by touching and dragging it. The operations when an image is enlarged by the [Zoom] button are as follow. yySlide the slider while tapping inside the tool window to move the tool window. yySlide the slider while tapping outside the tool window to change the image display position. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

3-15

Basic Operation

1 In the tool setting of the Settings

3


3 Edit the program name.

Inputting characters

3

The programs or tools to be displayed on the monitor can be named arbitrary. This section explains how to input characters using an example of [Program Name].

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

(5)

Basic Operation

(6)

According to the items to be set, the number of characters, character types, and characters which can be input are different.

1

(7)

On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the [Detail] button.

(8)

(9)

(1) Program name Displays a program name being editing. (2) [←] button Moves a cursor position to the left. (3) [→] button Moves a cursor position to the right. (4) [Delete] button Deletes one character to the left of the cursor.

2 Select the program to change the name and tap the [Edit] button.

Select the program

(5) Number of characters which can be input Displays a number of characters that can be input as a program name. (6) Character button Inputs an arbitrary character. According to selection of the [Upper/Lower] button, characters that can be input are different. (7) [Upper/Lower] button Switches a character to be input to uppercase / lowercase. (8) [Cancel] button Cancels a character input setting and returns to the Program details screen. (9) [OK] button Saves a character input setting and returns to the Program details screen.

4 After the characters are entered, tap the [OK] button.

3-16



Selecting the file in the USB memory

5 Select the file to be sent. (1)

This section explains how to select the file in the USB memory connected to the monitor using an example of [Transfer Program Settings].

(2)

1 On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the

3

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Basic Operation

[USB Memory] button.

(9)

(1) Folder display Displays a tree of currently displayed folder.

2 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.

(2) [Up One Folder] By selecting the [Up One Folder] and tapping the [OK] button, you can go to the upper hierarchy of currently displayed folder. (3) File / Folder display Displays a file and folder stored in the currently displayed folder. By selecting the folder and tapping the [OK] button, you can go into the selected folder. (4) [First] button Moves to top page in the folder.



The folder and file in the USB memory are displayed.

4 Select the folder that stores the data and tap the [OK] button.

Select

The folder and file stored in the selected folder will be displayed.

(5) [<<] button Moves to previous page in the folder. (6) [>>] button Moves to next page in the folder. (7) [Last] button Moves to last page in the folder. (8) [Cancel] button Cancels a setting and returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen. (9) [OK] button When the folder is selected, you can go into the selected folder. When the file is selected, the selection of a file will be determined.

6 After selecting a file, tap the [OK] button and proceed to the next setting.


3-17


MEMO

3 Basic Operation 3-18


4

Settings Navigator

This chapter explains the functions and operations of the [Settings Navigator].

(Setting the Judgment Condition)


4-1

4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Settings Navigator..............................................4-2 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator......4-3 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target).....................................4-6 2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)........4-20 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)...4-28 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)..............................4-60 Display Method of Extended Functions Menus.............................4-66

Settings Navigator

Settings Navigator In the Settings Navigator, the setting items of the program required for judging the target with the sensor are set in each step. While sequentially following the steps with navigation buttons, perform the setting using the menu buttons in accordance with the Settings Navigator guide. Navigation button

4

Settings Navigator guide


Menu button

Flow in the Settings Navigator STEP 1. Image Optimization settings Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target. Set the trigger option, adjust the brightness and imaging focus. “1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)

STEP 2. Registration of a master image Image the high-quality-target and the master image to serve as the reference of judgment. “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

STEP 3. Tool settings Set the tool to judge a target. Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set. “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)

STEP 4. Output assignment Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4). “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

4-2


Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator Starting the Settings Navigator

1

Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor.

6 Perform the following operation.

When the program which has not been set zz in step 5 is selected Tap the [Start] button.

When the sensor is in the following condition, the Sensor Setup Menu will be displayed. Proceed to step 5. yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time yyIf all programs are not being set yyIf the sensor is being setting up The Settings Navigator guide screen opens. Tap the [OK] button and start setting [1. Image Optimization]. “1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)

When the program which has been set in zz step 5 is selected

Tap the [Start] button. Or tap the shortcut button for each step.

The menu bar appears.

3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button. Shortcut button

The Settings Navigator guide screen of the selected step opens. The confirmation dialog appears.


The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

5 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

Tap the [OK] button and start the setting. “1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6) “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20) “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28) “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60) The Navi guide can be turned OFF if the display of the Navi guide screen is not needed.

The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

4-3


2 Tap the [Menu] button.

4


Settings Navigator screen and operation flow This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow. For details of the contents that can set on each setting screen and its operation, refer to the applicable references. A

4

1. Image Optimization


“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)

A

A 2. Master Registration “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

A A 3. Tool Settings “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)

4. Output Assignment “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

4-4



Displaying the Settings Navigator guide When the “Navi Guide” is ON zz

The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved and the system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen. yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation dialog to cancel the settings appears. By tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes without saving the settings. yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

Finishing without completing the step

1 Tap the [Save] button at the upper right of the screen.

You can display the function guide by tapping the button on the upper right of the screen when operating the corresponding functions.

When the “Navi Guide” is OFF zz The step guide / extended functions guide / function guide are not displayed

Finishing the Settings Navigator This section explains the procedure for finishing the Settings Navigator.

Finishing by completing all steps

1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator. 2 Tap the [Complete] button at the lower

right of the [Output Assignment] screen.

When the required settings are completed zz The confirmation dialog to save appears.

When the required settings are not zz completed

The confirmation dialog to finish appears. yyBy tapping the [Yes] button, the confirmation dialog to save appears. yyBy tapping the [No] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen. The required settings have not been completed yet. Even if the [OK] button is tapped, the proper operation cannot be performed.

2 Tap the [Yes] button.

The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved and the system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

When the program setting is changed, the confirmation dialog to save appears.

yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation dialog to cancel the settings appears. By tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes without saving the settings. yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen.


4-5


yyThe step guide appears only the first time when moving to each step. yyThe extended functions guide appears only the first time when displaying the Extended Functions menu. yyTo display the step guide and extended functions guide again, finish and then start the Settings Navigator again. yyThe function guide always appears when touching the following function buttons. Focus Adjustment / Fine Tune Outline / Margin / Color Extraction / Brightness Extraction / Fixed Reference Area

3 Tap the [Yes] button.


2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target) Setting the Image Optimization In this section, set the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. Adjust the image for defining differences in high and low-quality-targets.

Trigger Options zz


A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can image a target at any timing and can image continuously. “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8) “Checking the view and installed distance” (Page 2-2)

Auto Brightness Adjustment zz The sensor images a target by receiving the reflected light of the built-in light exposed to a target using the CMOS image sensor. In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, a target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by automatically adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, material). “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11)

Focus Adjustment zz Adjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Auto focus can adjust the focusing position automatically. “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12)

4-6


1. Image Optimization Trigger Options


3. Tool Settings

Auto Brightness Adjustment

Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment Extended functions

Main screen for the Image Optimization This section explains the main screen for the Image Optimization. (1)

(3) (4) (5) (6)

(2)

(8)

(9)

(1) [Back] button The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen. (2) Image taken by the sensor Displays an image taken by the sensor. The image type to be displayed differs depending on the settings screen. (3) [Save] button Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen. (4) [Image Type] display Displays the image type. yy

.................Displays an image taken by the currently imaging sensor.

(5) [Trig] button Displayed when an external trigger is set. The [Trig] and [Pause] button switches by each time the button is tapped. yy[Trig]..................Images by temporarily inputting the internal trigger. Tap this button when the position is to be defined while a target is being imaged in a state where the external trigger cannot be input. yy[Pause]..............Finishes the imaging with internal trigger.

(10)

(11)

(7) Extended functions display button Displays the extended functions menu for the Image Optimization. “Extended functions for the Image Optimization” (Page 4-16) (8) [Trigger Options] button Performs the settings for the Trigger Options. “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8) (9) [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button Automatically adjusts brightness. “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) (10) [Focus Adjustment] button Automatically adjusts focus. “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12) (11) [Next] button Proceeds to "2. Master Registration". “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

(6) [Zoom] button Switches to full-screen display and the image of the sensor can be zoomed. “Switching the display to the full-screen mode” (Page 5-5) - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

4-7


(7)

4




3. Tool Settings Focus Adjustment


Setting the Trigger Options A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can image a target at any timing, and can image continuously.

Settings for the Trigger Options

4

Items

Description

Setting range


Default value

yyInternal Starts imaging continuously within the time interval specified in the trigger interval setting. Trigger (Trigger type)

Trigger interval

Select the type of the timing to start imaging.

Set when the [Internal] is selected in the trigger type setting.

yyExternal Starts imaging with the external Internal trigger synchronized with the target's motion from a photoelectric sensor or PLC installed outside. The time (trigger delay) between inputting the trigger until imaging starts can be set.

1 to 10000 ms

50 ms

Set an interval (cycle) to automatically start imaging. Set when the [External] is selected in the trigger type setting.

Trigger Delay

4-8

Used when the output timing of the sensor for the trigger 0 to 1000 ms occurrence and the imaging timing of this device cannot be synchronized. This device starts imaging after the time set in the trigger delay of the trigger input es.


0 ms



3. Tool Settings


Focus Adjustment


Internal trigger zz Trigger interval Trigger interval (1) Internal trigger Imaging/ internal processing

(2)


(3) Status output

(1) The trigger will be input automatically according to the trigger interval settings. (2) Performs the internal processing after the imaging. (3) Outputs the status result.

External trigger zz Trigger delay (1) External trigger Imaging/ internal processing

(2) (3)

Status output

(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger at an arbitrary timing. When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed in the specified period. (2) Performs the internal processing after imaging. (3) Outputs the status result.


4-9





When the [Internal] is selected in step 4 zz

Start the Settings Navigator. “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Image Optimization.

4

“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page 4-4)


3 Tap the [Trigger Options] button.

The screen to set the Trigger Options opens.

4

Extended functions

5 Set the trigger interval or trigger delay.

Setting the Trigger Options

1


Select the trigger type.

Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to 10000 ms. If the internal trigger time is shorter than the processing time (Page 5-40), a trigger error occurs. “Internal trigger” (Page 7-3) “Error Messages” (Page A-22)

When the [External] is selected in step 4 zz Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to 1000 ms.

Select the [Internal] or [External] button.

The setting of the trigger interval and trigger delay can be changed by using the slider or inputting the value. “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14)

6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the Image Optimization.

4-10




3. Tool Settings


Auto Brightness Adjustment In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, the target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by automatically adjusting a light intensity, an exposure time and an imaging mode according to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, material).

1 Start the Settings Navigator.



Extended functions



yyThe brightness of an image can be adjusted manually. “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-18) yyDuring the auto brightness adjustment, the sensor automatically images a target by inputting the internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options settings. yyDo not move a target during the auto brightness adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted correctly.

3 Tap the [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button.

After the adjustment is completed, the “Brightness adjustment completed.” message appears.


4-11


“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)

Focus Adjustment






Focus Adjustment Adjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Adjusting the methods differ depending on the type of the sensor connected (manual focusing type/ auto focusing type).

4

Auto focusing type zz


The focus position is adjusted automatically. When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing position is adjusted automatically again. The focus can be adjusted manually with the slider displayed on the monitor. When the sensor detects multiple matching positions for the focusing position, the optional positions are marked on the slider. Select the focus position from the detected optional positions.


Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type





3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button.

Manual focusing type zz Turn the focus adjustment screw using the attached flathead screwdriver to adjust the focusing position.

When the [Auto Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-42) is set to [Common], the following dialog appears.

yyPlace a target at the appropriate position. “Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2) yyDo not move a target during the focus adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted correctly.

The guide screen for the Focus Adjustment opens.


The focusing position is adjusted automatically.

4-12




3. Tool Settings


5 Adjust the focusing position as needed.

When the focusing position is to be zz adjusted automatically again

When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing position is adjusted automatically again.

adjusted manually

Adjust the focus by the slider.

Extended functions


The system returns to the main screen for the Image Optimization. When the [Cancel] button is tapped, the focus will be reset to the previous position. yyDuring the auto adjustment, the sensor automatically images a target by inputting the internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options settings (Page 4-8). Also, when the continuous lighting (Page 4-18) is set, the sensor images with the flash lighting. yyThe auto adjustment searches the positions that can be focused over the entire area regardless of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).

For details of settings by using the slider, refer to “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14).

When multiple focusing positions exist zz When there are multiple positions that can be focused, the sensor adjusts to the closest position to the sensor. The options of the position that can be focused will be indicated with ( ) mark. To change the focusing position to the optional position, tap the [Next Pos] or the options ( ) of the focusing position.


4-13


When the focusing position is to be zz

Focus Adjustment






Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type



6 Turn the focus adjustment screw of

the sensor with the attached flathead screwdriver, and adjust the focus until the focus value reaches the peak mark.


4




3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button. Bar gauge

Peak mark

The Settings Navigator guide opens.


The focus indicator will be displayed on the monitor.

5 Image the target.

If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the button (Page 4-7) to image the target by

inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the button.

The peak mark is displayed on the position where the focus is at the maximum. Turn the focus adjustment screw to make the bar gauge on the peak mark position. By tapping the [Clear peak] button, the peak mark will be hidden, and the current focusing value will be updated as a maximum value. When the focus cannot be adjusted by watching the focus indicator on the monitor, you can check with the blinking cycle of the STATUS and OUT of the indicator light. yyQuickly blinks....... Focused. yySlowly blinks........ Not focused. Adjust to the most blinking position. STATUS indicator light

OUT indicator light

4-14




3. Tool Settings


Focus Adjustment



The system returns to the main screen for the Image Optimization. The focus indicator indicates the positions that can be focused over the entire area regardless of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).



4-15






Extended functions for the Image Optimization Adjust the Image Optimization in the extended functions menu.

Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization Items


Imaging Area

Description

Default value

Setting range

Sets the imaging area (image size of the sensor). When the imaging area is reduced, the shutter speed and judging process become faster. Bright Adjusts the brightness of an image manually.

yyEntire Sets the field of view of the imaging area for the sensor to the entire area. yyPartial Edit a tool window and set an arbitrary area in the sensor's field of view as an imaging area. Standard range type (color)

Entire

1 to 100

Standard range type (monochrome) 1 to 120 Short range type

1 to 120

Long rang type

1 to 100

20

Imaging Mode Selects imaging mode for sensor.

yyNormal This mode is the basic imaging mode. The target can be imaged with less noise. yyHDR Select to image a target such as a metal that reflects light and has high contrast. yyHighGain Select to shorten the exposure time and when the imaging environment is in a dark place. Lowers imaging quality due to high gain.

Normal

Lighting

Selects lighting mode for built-in light.

yyOFF Turns OFF the built-in light. yyFlash The built-in light lights within the exposure when imaging. yyContinuous The built-in light lights continuously regardless of specified exposure time when imaging a target.

Flash

Color Filters

Applies color filters if the outline of a certain color cannot be displayed when the image is displayed in monochrome by a color type sensor. (Color type only)

OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

OFF

Digital Zoom

Switches digital zoom ON/OFF. Images by magnifying the center field two times. The field of view ON/OFF of horizontal and vertical sides will be a half size. (Monochrome type only)

Advanced Brightness Adjustment

4-16


OFF


2. Master Registration Auto Brightness Adjustment

Imaging Area

1 Display extended functions menu for the Image Optimization.

“Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” (Page 4-66)

2

3. Tool Settings

Tap the [Imaging Area] button.

Focus Adjustment


For details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-15).



The screen to set the imaging area opens.

3 Select type of imaging area. Outside of specified area

If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.

Imaging area

yyIf the tool has been set, a rectangular area containing tool windows of all tools which have been set will be displayed as [Actv Range]. The imaging area cannot be set smaller than the active range. To narrow down the imaging area, change the placement of the tool windows before adjusting the imaging area. yySet an area including the center of the field of the view when trapezoidal correction (Page 6-38) is to be performed. A region that cannot be exposed is created in the exposure area. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

4-17


When an imaging area is specified, the area outside the specified area will be displayed in black.

4





Extended functions

Advanced Brightness Adjustment

Lighting

1 Display extended functions menu for the

1 Display extended functions menu for the

Image Optimization.


4


2 Tap the [Advanced Brightness Adjustment]

Image Optimization.



button.

2 Tap the [Lighting] button.

The screen to adjust brightness opens.

3 Select the lighting mode from

3 Set brightness and an imaging mode.

According to the brightness and imaging mode, the exposure time will be calculated automatically.

[OFF]/[Flash]/[Continuous].

Exposure time


yyFor the details of settings with the slider or by inputting a value, refer to “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14). yyBy tapping the [Auto] button, a light intensity, an exposure time and an imaging mode can be adjusted automatically.



The system returns to the main screen for the Image Optimization. yyIf the lighting mode is changed, re- the master image and re-set the tool. Otherwise a correct judgment may not be possible. yyWhen [Continuous] has been selected, the light goes off for approximately 0.3 ms right before imaging.

When the master image is ed and settings other than Trigger Options and imaging area are changed, the confirmation message that recommends you to re- the master image appears. Tap the [OK] button and re- the master image. “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20) 4-18




3. Tool Settings


Color Filters (color type only) This is disabled for the Color Area tool.



Focus Adjustment


Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)



2 Tap the [Digital Zoom] button.


2 Tap the [Color Filters] button.

3 Set the digital zoom to [ON]/[OFF]. The image changes to monochrome. In the example in the figure above, the red and blue outlines become unclear.

3 Select the color to apply the color filter.

Select the filter for the color or the complementary color to be detected. Select red here.



The color filter corresponding to the selected color will be applied. The red color becomes brighter and the outline with the blue color becomes clear.

Clarified outline

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. The system returns to the main screen for the Image Optimization.


4-19



3. Tool Settings


2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment) s a master image to be a reference for judgment.

Main screen for the Master Registration This section explains the main screen for the master image registration.

4

(1)

(3) (4)

(2)

(5)


(6)

(7)

(8)

(1) [Back] button Returns to the settings screen for the Image Optimization. “1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)

(6) Extended functions display button Displays extended functions menu for the master image registration. For details, refer to “Extended functions for the Master Registration” (Page 4-22).

(2) Master image Displays a master image. If no master image is ed, [No Master Image] will be displayed.

(7) [ Live Image as Master] button s an image taken by the sensor as a master image. For details, refer to “ing the master image” (Page 4-21).

(3) [Save] button Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen. (4) [Image Type] display Displays an image type. yy yy yy yy yy

.................Displays a master image (still image). .................Displays an image taken by the sensor which is currently imaging. .................Displays an image in the Sensor Image History. .................Displays an image in USB memory. .................Indicates that the monitor is in the Test mode.

(8) [Next] button Proceeds to "3. Tool settings". “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)

(5) [Zoom] button Switches the display in full-screen mode and makes it possible to enlarge an image on the monitor. For details, refer to “Switching the display to the full-screen mode” (Page 5-5).

4-20




3. Tool Settings

Live Image as Master

ing the master image





2 Display the main screen for the Master Registration.


of judgment on the imaging position.

4 Tap the [ Live Image as Master] button.

The master image will be ed and returns to the main screen for the Master Registration.

The disabling outline settings (Page 4-35, Page 4-55) will be initialized. Set the disabling outline settings again as needed.

Switches to the [LIVE] screen.

5 Image the target.

If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the button (Page 4-7) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the button.

6 Check the image displayed on the monitor and tap the [] button.

The confirmation dialog for the Master Registration appears.


4-21


3 Place the high-quality-target as reference

4




3. Tool Settings

Extended functions

Extended functions for the Master Registration Items of extended functions for the Master Registration

4


Select Img From Image History zz


s an image of the image history in the memory of the sensor as a master image. To perform the master image registration from the image history in the sensor, the image to be ed as a master image in the image history must be saved. “Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-14)

Master image registration from the image history in the sensor s an image of the image history in the memory of the sensor as a master image. “Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-14)

1 Display the extended functions menu for the Master Registration.


2 Tap the [Select Img From Image History] button.

Select Img From USB Memory zz s the image in USB memory as a master image. yySave the image to be ed as a master image to the USB memory in advance. yyThe files which can be ed as a master image are batch backup files (*.iva) and image capture files (*.ivp). “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory” (Page 6-18)

The [Sensor Image History] screen opens.

3 Select the image to be ed

as a master image and tap the [] button.

Brightness Correction zz Select the image

By setting a reference of brightness to the master image, effects of changing the brightness can be reduced. yyThe brightness correction can be set when the master image is ed. yyFor the Color Area tool of the color type, the brightness correction will be disabled.

For details of how to operate the screen, refer to “Loading and confirming the saved images” (Page 6-15). The selected screen opens on the monitor.

4-22




3. Tool Settings





The confirmation dialog appears. If the imaging area of the loaded image is different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an area that has not been imaged is ed, the area will be displayed in black.


The new master image will be ed and returns to the main screen for the Master Registration.


4-23




3. Tool Settings

Extended functions

ing from the image in the USB memory Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture file (*.ivp) stored in USB memory, and as a master image.

4


5 Select the image to be ed as

a master image and tap the [] button.

Select the image

When using a batch backup file (*.iva) „„ “Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-19)


1 Connect the USB memory which stores

the batch backup files (*.iva) to the USB port. “Installing the USB memory” (Page 6-18)

2 Display the extended functions menu for the master image registration.


3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory]

For details of how to operate the screen, refer to “Loading and confirming the saved images” (Page 6-15). The selected image will be magnified.


button.

The confirmation dialog appears. The data in USB memory will be displayed.

4 Select the file to be ed as a master image and tap the [OK] button.

If the imaging area of the loaded image is different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an area that has not been imaged is ed, the area will be displayed in black.

7 Tap the [OK] button. Select the file

For details of selecting the files in the USB memory, refer to “Selecting the file in the USB memory” (Page 3-17). The image of selected file will be displayed. 4-24

The new master image will be ed and returns to the main screen for the master image registration.




3. Tool Settings



When using an image capture file (*.ivp) 5 Check the image displayed on the monitor „„ “Saving the image history individually” (Page 6-20)

and tap the [] button.

1 Connect the USB memory which stores

the image capture files (*.ivp) to the USB port. “Installing the USB memory” (Page 6-18)

4

2 Display the extended functions menu for “Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” (Page 4-66)

3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory] button.

The confirmation dialog appears. If the imaging area of the loaded image is different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an area that has not been imaged is ed, the area will be displayed in black.


The data in USB memory will be displayed.

4 Select the file to be ed as a master image and tap the [OK] button.

Select the file

The new master image will be ed and returns to the main screen for the master image registration.

For details of selecting the files in the USB memory, refer to “Selecting the file in the USB memory” (Page 3-17). The selected image will be magnified.


4-25


the master image registration.




3. Tool Settings

Extended functions

5 Set the tool window to be a reference of

Brightness correction For the Color Area tool of the color type, this will be disabled.

4


brightness correction and tap the [OK] button.

1 Display the extended functions menu for the Master Registration.


Tool window to be a reference of brightness collection


2 Tap the [Brightness Correction] button.

The information screen opens (color type only).


The settings screen for the Brightness Correction opens. In the case of color operation type, the image will be displayed in monochrome.

For the region to be a reference of brightness correction, specify the following. yyA region with average medium brightness. A region with strong shininess and reflection and a region which is too dark may not be corrected properly. yyA region with a constant imaging status which does not change such as device parts other than the target’s . For details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-15).

6 Tap the [Test] button.

4 Tap the [Select Region] button.

The screen to set a reference of the brightness correction opens.

4-26

If the brightness in the specified region is changed using the masking shield, check that the brightness of the entire image is corrected.




3. Tool Settings



7 Tap the [Before Corr]/[After Corr] button and check the operation status before brightness correction and status after brightness correction.


8 Tap the [Back] button.

The system returns to the settings screen for the Brightness Correction.



yyWhen brightness correction is not to be used, tap the [Delete] button on the screen in step 4. yyBrightness correction corrects the brightness of the entire image to make the average brightness in the tool window to be a reference of brightness correction the same as the brightness of the master image.


4-27



3. Tool Settings


3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)


In this section, set the tool to judge whether a target is high-quality-target or low-quality-target in the master image. The aspects of a target ed as a master image are set as a high-quality-target. During an operation, the sensor judges whether it is a highquality-target or low-quality-target by judging the differences in the ed high-quality-target and a target to be examined. Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to 1 position adjustment tool can be set. Those tools can judge a target at the same time.

Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose Select a tool according to with the purpose of an examination.

Types of tools Outline tool zz A detection tool to calculate the matching rate for the target to be examined based on the outline information of a ed high-quality-target. Judges whether a target is a high or low-qualityproduct by setting the threshold to the matching rate. “Outline tool” (Page 4-32) Tool settings Master image

Outline extraction processing

Processing and judgment during an operation Internal processing

<Judge is OK>

Detection tool to be used Purposes

Outline tool

Color Area/ Area tool

To detect the surface/ rear face of parts

To detect the orientation of parts

-

To detect mixture of parts with different shapes

-

To detect assembly deficiencies of parts

To detect processing defects of parts

To detect differences in sizes (areas)

-

To detect mixture of different colors

-

Searches a target which has the outline of same shapes as an outline of a high-quality-target. Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated. Example when the result was NG No same shapes exist (Detection of existence)

Different shape (Shape detection)

Different direction (Detection of direction)

The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100. 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched. The matching rate decreases in accordance with the number of non-matched parts.

4-28




Color Area/Area tool zz

3. Tool Settings


Position Adjustment tool zz A tool to correct the differences in positioning (position gap) of a target to be examined. The position adjustment is used with other detection tools. “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-51) Tool settings

4

Master image


A tool to calculate the matching rate in the area (number of pixels) of a target to be examined as the basis (100 %) of the area (number of pixels) of a ed high-quality-target. This judges whether a target is a high or low-quality-product by setting the threshold to the matching rate. If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color Area tool. The system judges by the area with an arbitrary specified color. If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will be the Area tool. The system judges by the area with an arbitrary specified brightness. “Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-40) Tool settings Color extraction process (Color type) Master image

Brightness extraction process (Monochrome type)

Tool window Position adjustment window

Processing during an operation Position adjustment process

Processing and judgment during an operation Internal processing

<Judge is OK> Tool window Position adjustment window Search area of the tool window

Compares the area of a target as defining an area of high-quality-target to 100 %.

Example when the judgment was NG Area is narrow

Area is wide

yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100 (default). 100 indicates that an area is completely matched. The matching rate decreases as the area of a target narrows. yyThe setting range of the display range and threshold for matching rate can be changed to 0-200 or 0-999. Also, a target can be judged by setting the threshold to the upper limit. “Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-46) - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

4-29



3. Tool Settings


Main screen for the Tool Settings This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.

4

(1) (2)

(4) (5)

(3)

(6) (7)


(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(1) [Back] button Returns to the Master Registration screen. “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

(7) [View] button Displays a menu to select the display pattern of tools. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)

(2) [Tool Name] button Displays a name of the selected tool on the monitor. From the pull-down menu, the selected tool can be switched.

(8) Extended functions display button Displays the extended functions menu for the Tool Settings. “Extended functions for the Tool settings” (Page 4-58)

(3) Master image Displays the master image and tool window. If a search region is set, the tool window which indicate the search region (light blue) will be displayed. By tapping the tool window, the selected tool can be switched. (4) [Save] button Saves the settings. “Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5) (5) [Image Type] display Displays an image type. yy yy yy

.................Displays a master image (still image). .................Indicates that the monitor is in the Test mode. .................Displays an image taken by the sensor which is currently imaging.

(9) [Add Tool] button Adds tools. “Adding a tool” (Page 4-31) (10) [Edit Tool] button Edits settings for the selected tool. “Editing a tool” (Page 4-31) (11) [Delete Tool] button Deletes the selected tool. “Deleting a tool” (Page 4-31) (12) [Next] button Proceeds to the Output Assignment settings. “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

(6) [Zoom] button Switches to the full-screen display and makes it possible to enlarge an image on the monitor. For details, refer to “Switching the display to the full-screen mode” (Page 5-5). 4-30




Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool

3. Tool Settings


Editing a tool Edits the settings of a tool which has already been set.

Adding a tool

1 Select a tool to edit the settings.

Newly sets a tool.

1 Tap the [Add Tool] button.

4

2 Tap the tool to be added.


yyIf no tools are set, only the [Add Tool] button is displayed. yyIf one or more tools are set in one program, the [Edit Tool] and [Delete Tool] button are displayed.

2 Tap the [Edit Tool] button. 3 Edit setting items for each tool.

“Outline tool” (Page 4-32) “Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-40) “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-51)

Deleting a tool Deletes an unnecessary tool. By tapping the tools appears.

button, the help screen for

1 Select a tool to be deleted.

3 Set setting items for each tool.

“Outline tool” (Page 4-32) “Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-40) “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-51)

2 Tap the [Delete Tool] button. The confirmation dialog appears.


The selected tool will be deleted and returns to the main screen for the Tool settings.


4-31

1. Image Optimization Outline tool


Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool


Extended functions

Outline tool Setting items for the Outline tool Items

¨ Rect

Fine Tune Outline

Selects the window shape to specify an area of the target to be detected.

Entire yyEntire Specifies an area to search the Specifies the entire imaging area as a (Without position outline of a target. By specifying adjustment) search region. the smaller area as a search yyPartial Partial region, the processing time will Specifies a search region to an arbitrary (With position be shortened. size in the imaging area. adjustment) yyUndo The previous operation can be cancelled. Judges by disabling an You can undo back to 5 operations before. unnecessary outline which yyClear interrupts the stabilized Initializes all the disabling processes. detection. Specify by tracing yyEraser Width the extracted outline with stylus. Selects the eraser width (light/medium/ heavy) of the pen when specifying an unnecessary outline.

Sensitivity

yy¨ Rect Specifies with the rectangular window. An arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified with stylus. yy¡ Circle Specifies with the circular window. An arbitrary size and position can be specified with stylus.

Remove Outline

Default value

Search Region

Edit Window


Setting range

Window Shape

4

Description

yyHigh Extracts an outline of the image with low contrast. Used when an outline you wish to detect cannot be extracted. yyNorm Extracts the standard outline. yyLow Reduces the extracted volume of an outline. Reduces the extracted volume of an outline that is not necessary to detect.

Limit Adjustment

The extraction sensitivity of an outline can be selected according to the target.

Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) used in the OK/NG judgment. During threshold adjustment, the system turns to the Test mode so that the thresholds can be adjusted to the applicable value during an operation.

0 to 100

* 100 indicates that outline is completely matched. Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of unmatched parts. 4-32


Not specified

Norm

70


2. Master Registration Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings



6 Select a tool window shape.

Setting the Outline tool



2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings. “Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page 4-4)

4

¡ Circle

[Outline] button.

“Adding a tool” (Page 4-31) The main screen for the Outline tool settings opens.

4 Tap the [Edit Window] button.


The system returns to the screen to set the [Window Shape] and [Search Region].

8 Set the position, size, and angle of the

tool window in accordance with the target. Set the tool window

The screen to set the [Window Shape] and [Search Region] opens. yyOnce the tool window is tapped, you can proceed to step 8. yyBy tapping the < > extended functions display button, the extended functions menu for the Outline tool will be displayed. “Extended functions for the Outline tool” (Page 4-37)

5 Tap the [Window Shape] button.


9 Set a search region as needed.

“Setting a search region” (Page 4-35)


The system returns to the main screen for the Outline tool settings.

11 Adjust the outline as needed. The screen to select the window shape opens.

“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-35) “Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-36)


4-33


3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the

¨ Rect




3. Tool Settings


12 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.


Extended functions

14 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection by checking the matching rate.

<Setting example> If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.


The sensor turns to the Test mode.

13 Image a high-quality-target and a lowquality-target.


Matching rate

Threshold

yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yyAccording to the status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed using the slider or by inputting values. “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14) yyThe thresholds can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14) yyFor details of the matching rate, refer to “Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool” (Page A-5).




The system returns to the main screen for the Tool settings. 4-34




3. Tool Settings



Setting a search region „„

Settings for disabling outlines „„

When a range of the search region is to be specified, perform the following procedures.

Perform the following procedures to delete an unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.

1 Tap the [Search Region] button.

1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

4

2 Tap the [Partial] button.

The Settings Navigator guide opens. Tap the [OK] button.

2 Specify an outline which detection is not needed by tracing it with stylus.

The specified outline changes from green to yellow.

The editing screen for a search region opens.

3 Set a tool window indicates the search region.

Search region

yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-15). yyThe search region cannot be rotated.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

The outline that the outline extraction has disabled (yellow)

yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the pen when tracing an outline can be switched via [Eraser Width]. yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.



button.

The system returns to the screen to set [Window Shape] and [Search Region].


4-35


The selection screen for a search region opens.




3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

Setting a sensitivity „„ According to the target, perform the following procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an outline is selected.



The outline cannot be extracted


2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.

Select the [High] in this section.


Extracted outline


4-36


1. Image Optimization Outline tool > Extended functions


3. Tool Settings



Extended functions for the Outline tool Items

Margin

Search Algorithm

Setting range

Sets a range of the rotating direction to search an outline of the target. The system judges NG if an angle of the target exceeds its rotation range even if the target is the same shape. yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too wide, 0 to ± 180° (Unit: ± 1°) the acceptable range of variations of angles when a target is placed can be increased. yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too narrow, the processing time can be shorten. yyThis can be used for judging the direction of the target by limiting the rotation range.

Default value

± 20°

Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle set in Rotation Range.

yyON The tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. yyOFF The tool window will search only within the set rotation range.

The detection mode of the Outline tool can be selected according to the target.

yyHigh Accuracy Differences in outlines can be detected with a high degree of accuracy. High yyHigh Speed Outlines can be judged faster than Accuracy in high accuracy mode. There may be an influence from the background or unnecessary outlines other than the target.

An arbitrary name such as the name of a target can be set in tools. Tool names can be Tool Name checked on the run screen. “Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

Up to 8 characters in one byte English characters can be set.


ON

(None)

4-37


Rotation Range

Description



Outline tool > Extended functions

3. Tool Settings


Rotation Range „„

1 Display the extended functions menu of the Outline tool.


2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.

4



Extended functions



Search Algorithm „„




2 Tap the [Search Algorithm] button. 3 Set a rotation range of the Outline tool.

3 Select the type of search algorithm (High Speed/High Accuracy).

For details of setting using the slider or by inputting value, refer to “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14).

4 Set a margin of the rotation range. 4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.


yySelect [ON] when detection is not stable because of the influence of the rotation angle of the target. The tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search ± few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°) yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target. 4-38

yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not stable because of a small difference in the matching rate of a high and low-quality-target. yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not stable because of the influence of an unnecessary outline other than the target such as the background. yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the processing time.


1. Image Optimization Outline tool > Extended functions


3. Tool Settings



Tool Name „„



2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.


The screen to set the tool name opens.

3 Input an arbitrary name.

For details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16).


The system returns to the main screen for the Outline tool settings. The tool name which has been set will be displayed.

If the display language (Page 6-51) is changed, characters might be garbled. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

4-39




3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

Color Area/Area tool Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool Items

Description

Setting range

Default value

yy¨ Rect Specifies with the rectangular window. An arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified with stylus.

4

yy¡ Circle Specifies with the circular window. An arbitrary size and position can be specified with stylus.

¨ Rect

yyEntire The entire area (imaging area) of an image displayed in the monitor becomes the extraction target.

Edit Window

Add Mask

Mask


Window Shape

Select the window shape to specify an area of the target to be extracted.

Mask Shape

Cut mask

Clip Shape

Adds a rectangular/circular mask region in the tool window frame. Inside the mask region is excluded from an area extraction target. Adds a rectangular/circular cutting region in the mask region. Inside the mask cutting region, the mask is disabled and it becomes the target of the area extraction.

yy¨ Rect Specifies a rectangular mask region or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified with stylus. yy¡ Circle Specifies a circular mask region or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary size and position can be specified with stylus.

¨ Rect

yySetting counts Adding or cutting the mask can be set up to 20 times. yyExtract Area [+] Expands a range of the color to be extracted and expands an extraction area.

Color Extraction (For color type)

Tap a color to be extracted on the master image and set an extraction range.

yyExtract Area [-] Contracts a range of the color to be extracted and narrows an extraction (No extraction) area. yyUndo The previous operation can be cancelled. yyClear Cancels the selection of the tapped color.

to Live Image

4-40

The color range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.


-

-


Items


Description

3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

Setting range

Default value

yyExtraction Area Sets the upper and the lower limit of brightness in a range within 0 to 255 with the tapped brightness as a Tap brightness to be extracted reference. Brightness Extraction (No extraction) on the master image and set yyUndo (For monochrome type) the extraction range. The previous operation can be cancelled.

to Live Image

Limit Adjustment

A brightness range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.

-

Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) used in the OK/NG judgment. During the thresholds adjustment, the 0 to 100 (when the upper limit setting system switches to the Test is OFF) mode so that a threshold can be adjusted to an applicable value during an operation.

Scale

yy0-200 When the upper limit of Sets the upper and the lower limit of the threshold is ON, select a threshold in a range within 0 to 200. the threshold scale in y 0-999 y accordance with the range Sets the upper and the lower limit of a of the matching rate required threshold in a range within 0 to 999. for the judgment. The slider movement unit is 5.

Upper Limit

Upper Limit

Sets the upper limit of the threshold. Set when the OK/NG judgment is desired if the target area is larger than the OK area.

yyEnable Activates the upper limit setting. yyDisable Deactivates the upper limit setting.

-

50

Disable

0-200

* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area and larger with a wider area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.


4-41


yyClear Cancels the selection of the tapped brightness.

4




3. Tool Settings


Setting the Color Area/Area tool


Extended functions




2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.

4



3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the

¨ Rect

¡ Circle

[ColorArea] button (color type) or [Area] button (monochrome type).

“Adding a tool” (Page 4-31) The main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings opens.


When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will be hidden.


The system returns to the screen to set the [Window Shape] and [Mask].

8 Set the position, size, and angle of tool window in accordance with a target.

Set the tool window

The screen to set the [Window Shape] and [Mask] opens. yyOnce the tool window is tapped, you can proceed to step 8. yyBy tapping the < > extended functions display button, the extended functions menu for the Color Area/Area tool will be displayed. “Extended functions of the Color Area/ Area tool” (Page 4-48)



9 Perform the mask setting as needed.

Inside the mask region is excluded from the area extraction target. “Mask settings” (Page 4-45)


The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings.

The screen to select the window shape opens.

4-42




11 Set the area to be the target to extract. For color type zz

3. Tool Settings



For monochrome type zz

Tap the [Brightness Extraction] button.

Tap the [Color Extraction] button.

4

The tapped color will be extracted. yyIf the areas of color that have not been extracted are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can be added. yyTap the [+] / [-] button of the extraction range, and the range of color to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.

yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the range of the color to be extracted can be set with the Live Image of the target. yyWhen the color extraction is to be performed again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the color to be the reference of judgment again. After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area tool settings.

The tapped brightness will be extracted. yyIf the areas of brightness that have not been extracted are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can be added. yyAdjust the slider, and the range of the brightness to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.

yyFor details of settings by using the slider, refer to “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14). yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the range of the brightness to be extracted can be set with the Live image of the target. yyWhen the brightness extraction is to be performed again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the color to be the reference for judgment again. After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. The system returns to the main screen for the Area tool settings.


4-43


The Settings Navigator guide opens. Tap the [OK] button. The screen to select a color to be extracted opens. Tap the color to be the reference of judgment for the color area.

The Settings Navigator guide opens. Tap the [OK] button. The screen to select brightness to be extracted opens. Tap the brightness to be the reference of judgment for the color area.




3. Tool Settings




Extended functions

15 Set the upper limit as needed.

“Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-46)



4



The sensor turns to Test mode.

13 Image a high-quality-target and a lowquality-target.


14 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

by checking the matching rate.

<Setting example> If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.

Matching rate

Threshold

yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yyIn accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed using the slider or by inputting values. “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14) yyThe thresholds can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14) 4-44




Mask settings „„ Perform the following procedures if a mask region is to be specified in the tool window.

3. Tool Settings




mask shape in accordance with the target. Set mask shape

1 Tap the [Mask] button

4

2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.


The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.

7 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask region.

The screen to set a mask region and a mask shape opens.

3 Tap the [Mask Shape] button. The screen to set a mask cutting region and cutting shape opens.

8 Tap the [Clip Shape] button. 4 Select the mask shape and tap the [OK] button.


4-45


The screen to set a mask region opens.





3. Tool Settings


9 Select the cutting shape and tap the [OK] button.


Extended functions

Setting the upper limit „„ To perform the OK/NG judgment when an area of the target is wider than an area of a high-qualitytarget, perform the following procedures.

1 Tap the [Upper Limit] button.



cutting shape in accordance with the target. Set clip shape

2 Tap the [Enable] button for the upper limit threshold and select the scale.



Select the scale in accordance with a range of the matching rate required for judgment.

The system returns to the screen to set the mask region.


button.

12

Repeat steps 2 to 11 as needed and set the mask region.

button.

The slider to set the upper limit and the lower limit of the threshold will be displayed.


Area not be masked Masked area

The system returns to the screen to set the [Window Shape] and [Mask].

4-46




3. Tool Settings



4 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection by checking the matching rate.


Matching rate

Threshold (upper limit) Threshold (lower limit)

yyJudged OK when the matching rate is within threshold range, and NG when it is outside the range. yyIn accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed using the slider or by inputting values. “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14) yyThe thresholds can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14)




4-47



3. Tool Settings

Color Area/Area tool > Extended functions



Extended functions

Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool Items

4

Description

Setting range yyH (hue) 0° to 359° (both starting point and ending point)


yyColor type Advanced Color Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB Extraction yyS (saturation) (H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness). (For color type) 0 to 255 Advanced Brightness yyB (Brightness) Extraction 0 to 255 (For monochrome type) yyMonochrome type Specifies brightness value to be 0 to 255 extracted.

-

-

to Live Image

A color/brightness range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.

-

-

Tool Name

An arbitrary name such as name of a target can be set to tools. Tool names can be checked on the run screen. “Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

Up to 8 characters in one byte English characters can be set.

(None)

yyDisable Matches the area extracted from the master image as the criteria of a rate of 100%. yyEnable: Large Select a condition which the matching rate Matches 1/10th of the total sensor view of the Color Area/Area is 100%. as the criteria of a rate of 100%. yyEnable: Small Matches 1/100th of the total sensor view as the criteria of a rate of 100%.

Disable

Fixed Reference Area

4-48

Default value





Advanced Color Extraction/ „„

Advanced Brightness Extraction

1 Display the extended functions menu of the Color Area/Area tool.


3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

Tool Name „„



Tap the [Tool Name] button. 2 Tap the [Advanced Color Extraction] button. 2


For monochrome type, tap the [Advanced Brightness Extraction] button.

The screen to set the tool name opens.

3 Specify a color or brightness of the

3 Input an arbitrary name.

extraction target.

For color type zz

For details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16).

For monochrome type zz


The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings. The tool name which has been set will be displayed.

When the [to Live Image] button is tapped, the color extraction condition can be checked with the Live image.



If the display language (Page 6-51) is changed, characters might be garbled.


4-49



3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

5 Extract the color/brightness range to be judged.

Fixed Reference Area „„

Extract from the Live image zz

Select [Enable] if the color/brightness to be judged in the master image cannot be detected.

4


Tap the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness Extraction] button. By tapping the [to Live Image] button, extract the color/ brightness range to be judged from “LIVE” image.

The Color Area/Area tools with the fixed reference area set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool Auto Tuning target.




2 Tap the [Fixed Reference Area] button.

The color/brightness range to be extracted can be specified by using [Advanced Color Extraction]/[Advanced Brightness Extraction].

Extract from the master image, and then zz move the tool window


3 Perform the “Fixed Reference Area”.

Tap the [Edit Window] button and move the tool window. By tapping the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness Extraction] button, extract the color/brightness range to be judged. Tap the [Edit Window] button again, and move the tool window to the position where the color/ brightness is to be judged.

Extract the color/ brightness


Move

6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings.

4-50




3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

Position Adjustment tool If there are varies of the position determining of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly. The amount that the target is off-centered in regards to the master image will be calculated by the internal sensor and corrected by the position adjustment tool, so the off-centered position can be detected correctly even if the position was off-centered. Tool settings Master image

4

Run Position adjustment process

Position adjustment window

Tool window Position adjustment window Search region of the tool window

yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being used, the processing time will be longer. yyIn the case of the Outline tool, the search range position will be adjusted. The outline of a target is searched in adjusted search range and the searched outline will be judged. yyUsed when an area of the target to be examined and a relative position of the target are determined and when there is variability in determining the position (position or angle) of a target. For example, intended purposes are shown below. - For package box, whether or not the seal is put in the determined area and direction. - For components, whether logos/symbols/insignias are in-print or not. yyIf the position adjustment fails, the result of position adjustment is NG. In this case, the total status result is NG. The individually set detection tool will not be judged. Failure of position adjustment can be checked with position adjustment output. Review the position adjustment settings and position determining accuracy for a target. “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60) yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added, the following settings for the detection tools have been set will be changed. - Outline tool : When the search region is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default value in which the position adjustment is enabled. - Color Area/Area tool : When the window shape is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default value in which the position adjustment is enabled. yyOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be set in one program. By setting the position adjustment, the position adjustment will be applied to all detection tools. “Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment yyFor details of matching rate, refer to Tool” (Page A-5).


4-51


Tool window




3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool Items

Setting range

Window Shape

yy¨ Rect Specifies with the rectangular window. An arbitrary size, position, and angle Select a shape of the window can be specified with stylus. to specify the range of a target to be position adjustment yy¡ Circle Specifies with the circular window. reference. An arbitrary size and position can be specified with stylus.

Search Region

Specifies an area to search yyEntire a target to be a reference Specifies the entire imaging area as a of position adjustment. By search region. specifying the narrower area as yyPartial a search region, the processing Specifies a search region to an arbitrary time will be shortened. size in the imaging area.

Remove Outline

yyUndo The previous operation can be cancelled. You can undo back to 5 operations before. yyClear Initializes all the disabling processes. yyEraser Width Selects the eraser width (light/medium/ heavy) of the pen when specifying an unnecessary outline.

Sensitivity

Fine Tune Outline


Edit Window

4

Description

Limit Adjustment

¨ Rect

Entire

Unnecessary outlines which obstruct the steady position adjustments can be disabled. Specifies by tracing the extracted outline with stylus.

Not specified

The extraction sensitivity of an outline can be selected according to the target.

yyHigh Extracts an outline of the image with low contrast. Used when an outline you wish to detect cannot be extracted. yyNorm Extracts the standard outline. yyLow Reduces the extracted volume of an outline. Reduces the extracted volume of an outline that is not necessary to detect.

Norm

Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) which judges whether the position adjustment is succeeded or failed. During threshold adjustment, the 0 to 100 system switches to the Test mode so that the threshold can be adjusted to an applicable value during an operation.

* 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched. Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of non-matched parts. 4-52

Default value


70



Setting the Position Adjustment tool

3. Tool Settings






2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings. “Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page 4-4)

4

¡ Circle

[Pos.Adj.] button.

“Adding a tool” (Page 4-31) The main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings opens.



The system returns to the screen to set the [Window Shape] and [Search Region].

8 Set the position, size, and angle of tool window in accordance with a target.

Set the tool window

The screen to set the [Window Shape] and [Search Region] opens. yyOnce the tool window is tapped, you can proceed to step 8. yyBy tapping the < > extended functions display button, the extended functions menu for the position adjustment tool will be displayed. “Extended functions for the Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-57)


Set the position and size of tool window as large as possible by selecting the part that is dissimilar in shape. “Stabilizing the position adjustment” (Page 5-37) For details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-15).

9 Set a search region as needed.

“Setting a search region” (Page 4-55)


The screen to select the window shape opens.

The system returns to the main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings.


4-53


3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and then the

¨ Rect




3. Tool Settings


11 Adjust the outline as needed.

“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-55) “Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-56)


Extended functions

14 Adjust a threshold to judge whether or not the position adjustment is succeeded by checking the matching rate.



Matching rate


13 Image the target.

If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the button (Page 4-7) to image the target by

inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the button.

Threshold

yyIf there are many variations of target shapes that a tool window has been set to, set the threshold to a lower matching rate. yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yyIn accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed using the slider or by inputting values. “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14) yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the sensor setting menu screen. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14)




The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

4-54




3. Tool Settings



Setting a search region „„

Settings for disabling outlines „„

To limit a range (adjusting range of position adjustment) to search a target to be a reference, set it in the search region setting. When a range of the search region is to be specified, perform the following procedures.

Perform the following procedures to delete an unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.


1 Tap the [Search Region] button.

4

The selection screen for a search region opens.

2 Tap the [Partial] button.

2 Specify the unnecessary outline in basic

shapes of position adjustment by tracing it with stylus. The specified outline changes from green to yellow.

The editing screen for a search region opens.

3 Set the tool window indicates a search region.

Search region

yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-15). yyThe search region cannot be rotated.


The outline that the outline extraction has disabled (yellow)

yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the pen when tracing an outline can be switched via [Eraser Width]. yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.



button.

The system returns to the screen to set [Window Shape] and [Search Region]. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

4-55






3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

Setting a sensitivity „„ According to the target, perform the following procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an outline is selected.



The outline cannot be extracted


2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.

Select [High] in this section.


Extracted outline


4-56





3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool > Extended functions


Extended functions for the Position Adjustment tool Items

Rotation Range

Default value

Setting range

Sets a range to adjust the position to the rotating direction. The status result of position adjustment is NG without adjusting the position if an angle of a target exceeds its rotation range. 0 to ±180° yyIf the setting of rotation range is too wide, the acceptable range of variation in angles when a target is placed can be set wider. (Unit: ±1°) yyIf the setting of rotation range is too narrow, the processing time can be shorten.

Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle set in Rotation Range.

±20°

yyON The tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. yyOFF The tool window will search only within the set rotation range.

ON

Rotation Range „„

1 Display the extended functions menu for the Position Adjustment tool.

4 Set a margin of the rotation range.


2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.

3 Set the rotation range of the Position Adjustment tool.

yySelect [ON] when the position adjustment is not stable because of the influence of the rotation angle of the target. The tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search ± few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.) yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target.


The system returns to the main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings. For details of settings by the slider or inputting value, refer to “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14). - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

4-57


Margin

Description




3. Tool Settings



Extended functions

Extended functions for the Tool settings Items of extended functions for the Tool settings Items

4

Copy Tool

Description

Setting range

Default value

-

-


Copies a tool which has been set, and pastes it to the same position. This is for outline tool and color area/area tool.

Copy Tool This section explains using example of the Outline tool.

1 Select the copy source tool.

4 Tap the [OK] button. Select the copy source tool.

2 Display the extended functions menu for the Tool settings.

The copied tool window with the selected status will be displayed in the copy source tool window. Name of copied tool


3 Tap the [Copy Tool] button.

Copied tool

The tool number which has not been set will be automatically assigned to the copy destination tool number.

The confirmation dialog appears. If 16 tools are set, tools cannot be copied.

5 Tap the [Edit Tool] button and set the copied tool.

“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)

4-58


MEMO


4-59




3. Tool Settings


4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) Set the output items to be assigned to the output line (OUT1 to OUT4). “Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor” (Page 2-12) “Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 7-1)

4

Main screen for the Output Assignment

Setting range of the Output Assignment Setting range

Description

OFF

Do not output. Output function will be constantly OFF.


When the total status result of the tools which have been set was OK, the output function turns ON. Total Status The condition of the total status can be selected from [All Tools OK] / [Any Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

(1)

(2)

Tot. StatusNG

(3)

RUN

When the sensor is running with no system error occurred, the output function turns ON.

BUSY

The output function turns ON when the system is in a state that cannot input additional trigger; such as during imaging, judging processing, switching programs, and ing external master images.

Error

The output function turns ON when an error has occurred; such as system error, memory readout error for startup, external master registration error, trigger error (when the trigger settings are enabled).

Pos. Adj.

When position adjustment processing is finished normally, the output function turns ON.

Tool 01 to 16

When the status result of specified tool is OK, the output function turns ON. Status results can be output for each tool.

Logic 1 to 4

When the status result of specified logic is OK, the output function turns ON.

(4) (5)

(1) [Back] button Returns to the Tool settings screen. “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28) (2) Output assignment button Assigns the output item to each output line. (3) [ON]/[OFF] button for the trigger error output Select whether to enable/disable the output when the trigger error occurred. “Error Messages” (Page A-22) (4) [Complete] button Finishes the Settings Navigator. “Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5) (5) Extended functions display button Displays the extended functions menu for the Output Assignment. “Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” (Page 4-66)

When the total status result was NG, the output function turns ON.

Default value „„ OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Trigger Error

:Total Status (N.O.) :BUSY (N.O.) :Error (N.C.) :OFF :OFF

yyN.O./N.C. can be changed. “Output Settings” (Page 6-27) yyThe input cable assignment can be changed. “Input Settings” (Page 6-26) 4-60




3. Tool Settings Output Assignment


Setting the Output Assignment



2 Display the main screen for the Output Assignment.

4

“ Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page 4-4)


3 Tap the item name of output line to perform

output assignment and select the output item.

4 Finish the Settings Navigator.

“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)


4-61

1. Image Optimization Output Assignment


3. Tool Settings


Extended functions

Extended functions for the Output Assignment Extended functions items for the Output Assignment Items

Description


Logic

Total Status Conditions

4-62

Default value

Assigns the logical operation results of each detection tool to the output function. Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can be defined.

yyUnused The selected items are not used in a logical formula. yyUsed When the status results of the selected items were OK, the total status output function turns ON. yyUsed (Inverse) When the status results of the selected items were NG, the total status output function turns ON.

Unused

Selects the logical operation method of logics.

yyAND Calculates the logical multiply (AND) of all selected items. yyOR Calculates the logical sum (OR) of all selected items.

AND

Selects a condition for the total status result. The total status result is displayed in accordance with the selected condition.

yyAll Tools OK When all of the status results of the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON. yyAny Tools OK When any of the status results of All Tools OK the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON. yyLogic 1 to 4 When the status result of the set logic was OK, the total status output function turns ON.

4 Logic Settings

Setting range




3. Tool Settings


Output Assignment

Logic Settings „„

1 Display the extended functions menu for

Extended functions

5 Select items to be integrated into the logic.

the Output Assignment.


2 Tap the [Logic Settings] button.

4

The Logic Settings screen opens.

3 Tap the number which the logic judgement condition is to be defined.

The status result of the logic is calculated from OK/NG of all of the items which [Used] or [Used (Inverse)] has been set.

Logic : AND zz Tool A Tool B Tool C (Inverse)

Logic 1 to 4

Image of logic output when the Logic is [AND]

When an undefined detection tool has been defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is selected.] is displayed on the right side of the logic number.

4 Select the logical operation method of the logic.

Tool A

Tool B

Tool C

Logic

OK

OK

OK

NG

NG

OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

NG

NG

NG

OK

NG

OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

NG

NG

OK

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

yyWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic output is the logical multiply (AND) of the status results of each selected item. yyWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic output is the logical sum (OR) of the status results of each selected item. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

4-63


Red checks are displayed at the items which "Used" is selected. Blue checks are displayed at the items which "Used (Inverst)" is selected.

1. Image Optimization Output Assignment


3. Tool Settings

Extended functions

6 When the setting is completed, tap the

Logic : OR zz

[OK] button.

Tool A Tool B Tool C (Inverse)

Logic 1 to 4

The system returns to the Logic Settings screen.

7 Tap the [Close] button.


Image of logic output when the Logic is [OR]

4



Tool A

Tool B

Tool C

Logic

OK

OK

OK

OK

NG

OK

OK

OK

OK

NG

OK

OK

NG

NG

OK

NG

OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

OK

NG

NG

OK

NG

NG

NG

OK

yySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used (Inverse)] for each item (Position Adjustment/ Tool 01 to Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4). yyWhen the status results of the [Used] items were OK, the status output function for items in the logic turns ON. yyWhen the status results of the [Used (Inverse)] items were NG, the status output function for items in the logic turns ON. yyTo define a logic which has been set to another logic, use the logic number which is greater than the logic number which has been set. For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4 in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic. When the program number has been changed and you went to [Run] from [Program] after the power ON, the judgement is not done if no trigger input. The judgement output of each tool is OFF.

4-64




3. Tool Settings Output Assignment

Total Status Conditions „„

1

Extended functions

Any Tools OK zz

Display the extended functions menu for the Output Assignment. “Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” (Page 4-66)

2


Tap the [Total Status Conditions] button.

When any of the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON. Tool A Tool B

OK NG OK NG

4

Image of total status output when the total status condition is [Any Tools OK]

3 Select a total status condition.

For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the position adjustment is not included in the total status conditions.

Logic 1 to 4 zz When the status result of the defined logic was OK, the total status output function turns ON. Logic OK 1 to 4 NG Total OK Status NG

The total status result is displayed in accordance with the selected condition.

Image of total status output when the total status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]

All Tools OK zz When all of the detection tools were OK, the total status output function turns ON. Tool A Tool B

OK NG OK NG

yyWhen the position adjustment failed, the status result of each tool is NG. yyIf the Area tool window is protruded from the imaging area when position adjustment succeeded, the tool cannot be judged and the status result is NG.

4 When the setting is completed, tap the

Total OK Status NG

[OK] button.

Image of total status output when the total status condition is [All Tools OK]



4-65


Total OK Status NG

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

4

In each setting for Settings Navigator, the extended functions menu will be displayed by tapping the < > extended functions display button at the lower left on the screen. This section explains how to display the extended functions menu using an example of the Image Optimization screen. For details of extended functions menu, refer to details in each step.





“ Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page 4-4)

3 Tap the <

> extended functions display button at the lower left of the window.

The extended functions menu will be displayed.

Tap the arbitrary button and set the extended functions menu. The extended functions menu will be hidden by tapping the < > button.

4-66


5

Operating/Adjusting

This chapter explains the procedures for starting the operation, the names and functions of each part and the adjustment procedures to fully utilize the judgment ability of the IV Series.


5-1

5 Operating/Adjusting

Starting an Operation.........................................5-2 Overview of the Operation Screen....................5-3 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen.........................................5-4 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment...............5-14 Tool Auto Tuning ( Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)...............5-15 Stabilizing the Judgment Process..................5-32 Shortening the Processing Time....................5-40

Starting an Operation

Starting an Operation Starts an operation in accordance with the program created with the Settings Navigator. The sensor can be independently operated.

Turning on the power and starting an operation

5

Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation

1 Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor. 1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as Settings Navigator. 2 Confirm that the operation screen opens. “Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5) The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

Operating/Adjusting

2 Tap the [RUN] button.

If the image or status result does not update, refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-19). The run screen opens and the operation starts. When the power of the monitor is turned on for the first time, the initial settings screen opens. “Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-5)

5-2

If the image or status result does not update, refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-19).


Overview of the Operation Screen

Overview of the Operation Screen Start screen Menu OFF (Page 5-4)

5

Menu ON (Page 5-4) (Page 5-5) Hides the title and menu button, and displays the entire image. Changes the display magnification of an image.

Display setting screen Selects the [Tool View] and [Analysis] menu, and set the information to display on the monitor.

Statistics display screen

Histogram display screen

(Page 5-10)

(Page 5-12)

Displays the statistical information of the status result.

Displays the histogram of the status result.


Selecting the display method of the tool. (Page 5-7)

5-3

Operating/Adjusting

Zoom/Full-screen mode

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen In the operation screen, the displayed items will be different depending on the ON/OFF of the menus.

Menu Screen Menu OFF zz

(8)

(1) (2)

(10) (11)

(3)

5

Menu ON zz

(9)

(9)

(8)

(1) (2)

(10) (11)

(3)

(4)

(4)

(5)

(5)

(12) (13) (14)

Operating/Adjusting

(7) (6) (15)

(1) Title Displays the device name (Page 6-29), program number (Page 6-7), and program name of the sensor (Page 6-12). (2) Tool Name Displays the tool number and tool name of the tool selected on the monitor (Page 4-30). The selected tool can also be switched. (3) Brightness correction region When the brightness correction is being set, the brightness correction region will be displayed with a blue frame. (4) Tool window Displays the tool region which has been set with green frame when the status result is OK, and displays with red frame when the status result is NG. The tool selected by tapping the region can also be switched. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) (5) Search region If the search region of the selected tool is being set to partial, the search region will be displayed with a light blue frame. If the position adjustment is being set, the search region after the position adjustment will be displayed. (6) [Menu] button Switches to the display in Menu ON mode. When the touch is locked, the will be displayed. “Touch Screen Lock” (Page 6-50) 5-4

(16)

(17)

(18)

(7) [OFF] button Switches to the display in Menu OFF mode. (8) Status gauge Displays status results (OK/NG) of the tool selected on the monitor, a line indicating the threshold, and a value of the matching rate. When the status gauge is tapped, the operation turns to Threshold Adjustment mode (Page 5-14). Judge is OK (green)

Threshold

Judge is NG (red)

Matching rate

For details of the status results, refer to “Displaying and outputting the status result” (Page A-4). (9) OK/NG display Displays the total status result. yyIf the total status result is OK, OK will be displayed. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/ [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. yyIf the total status result is NG, NG will be displayed. (10) Processing time Displays the time from receiving an external trigger or an internal trigger to output the status result. In the case of the One-Shot output (Page 6-27), the ON-Delay Time is not included.



(11) Condition Display Displays the Condition of the monitor. ......... Indicates “Running”. ......... Indicates “Test mode”. The status result will not be output. (12) [Trig] button Displayed when an external trigger is set. A trigger is issued by each tap on a button. This button is used when the external trigger cannot be input. The button can be set to be displayed or hidden. “Display Settings” (Page 6-49)

When the [Zoom] button displayed in the Menu ON screen is tapped, the title and menus displayed on the monitor become hidden and the display will be switched to the full-screen mode.

1 Tap the [Zoom] button. If the [Zoom] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu] button at the lower left corner of the screen.

(14) [View] button Displays the menu to select display methods for the tools and analysis screen. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) (15) [Monitor Settings] button Displays the Monitor Settings screen. “Setting the Advanced Monitor Information” (Page 6-45)


(13) [Zoom] button Switches the display in full-screen mode and makes it possible to enlarge the images on the monitor. “Switching the display to the full-screen mode” (Page 5-5)

Switching the display to the fullscreen mode

Switches to the full-screen mode.

(16) [Sensor Image History] button Displays the Sensor Image History screen. “Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-14) (17) [USB Memory] button Displays the USB Memory screen. “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory” (Page 6-18) (18) [Sensor Setup] button Stops the running mode to display the Sensor Setup Menu screen. If the lock has been set to the sensor, will be displayed. “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page 6-7) “ Lock” (Page 6-30) When [OFF] is selected in the display method of the tool (Page 5-7), the tool name, search region, tool window, and status gauge will be hidden.


5-5


Enlarging the image display In the full-screen mode, the display magnification of images can be changed.

1 Switch the display to the full-screen mode. “Switching the display to the full-screen mode” (Page 5-5)

2 Change the magnification ratio to the desired

5

ratio by tapping the

or

button.

Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed There are two methods for selecting the tool, whose information you wish to display; (1) selecting the tool from the pull-down menu and (2) tapping the tool window on the monitor

Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu „„

1 Select the tool whose information you

wish to display from the pull-down menu by tapping the tool name.

Operating/Adjusting

Select the tool

Move button

Information of the selected tool will be displayed. yyThe selectable ratios are 1.0x/1.5x/2.0x/3.0x. yyThe display is enlarged each time you tap on the [+] button. yyThe display is reduced each time you tap on the [-] button. yyIn the enlarged display, the enlarged area currently displayed is indicated at the left of the [Back] button. Enlarged area currently displayed Entire image

yyIf the [Back] button is tapped while the image is enlarged, the screen returns to the Menu ON screen maintaining the current magnification ratio.

Information of the selected tool

Selected tool

Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor „„

1 Tap the tool window of the tool whose information you wish to display.

Selected tool

3 Adjust the display position of the enlarged image as needed.

Tap the tool

yyYou can change the display position of the enlarged image by tapping the move button or swiping the image on the monitor. yyIf you tap the [+] or [-] button after changing the display position, the image will be enlarged/reduced with reference to the center of the image displayed on the monitor.

Information of the tapped tool will be displayed.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [Back] button.

5-6


Information of the tapped tool

tapped tool


Selecting a display method for tools When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are displayed. If one of the display methods for [Tool View] is selected and the [OK] button is tapped, the display on the monitor changes in accordance with the selected display method.

Display methods for tools Depending on the type of the sensor (color or monochrome type), selectable display methods are different.

For color type „„ OFF zz

1 Tap the [View] button.

5

The tool windows and search regions of all tools become hidden. The tool name and the status gauge will also be hidden.

Window zz

The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are displayed.

2 Tap the display method for [Tool View] in accordance with the intended purpose.

Selected tool yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thick line. If the mask region is set to the Color Area tool, the region that the tool window and mask region are combined will be displayed. yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light blue. For details of the display methods for [Tool View], refer to “Display methods for tools” (Page 5-7).


The display method for tools changes in accordance with the selected menu.

Non selected tools yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thin line. yyThe search region and the mask region will not be displayed. Common When the result of position adjustment and the status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be displayed in green. If one of the status results is NG, the tool will be displayed in red. Displays the brightness correction window in blue.


5-7

Operating/Adjusting

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu] button at the lower left corner of the monitor.


For monochrome type „„

Process 1 zz

OFF zz Outside the tool window Inside the tool window

5

Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same.

Operating/Adjusting

Selected tool yyOutline tool Displays inside the tool window in monochrome, and outside of the tool window in color. Indicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG). If the brightness correction has been set, the inside the tool window is displayed with the corrected brightness. yyColor Area tool Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or red (NG).

Process 2 zz

Outside the search region Inside the search region

Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same. Selected tool yyOutline tool Displays inside the tool window and search region in monochrome, and outside of the search region in color. If the brightness correction has been set, inside the search region is displayed with the corrected brightness. yyColor Area tool Displays inside the tool window in monochrome. The extracted region is displayed in the color of the target.

5-8

The tool windows and search regions of all tools become hidden. The tool name and the status gauge will also be hidden.

Window zz

Selected tool yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thick line. If the mask region is set to the Area tool, the region that the tool window and mask region are combined will be displayed. yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light blue. Non selected tools yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thin line. yyThe search region and the mask region will not be displayed. Common When the result of position adjustment and the status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be displayed in green. If one of the status results is NG, the tool will be displayed in red. Displays the brightness correction window in blue.



Process zz

Process 2 zz

Outside the search region Inside the search region

Selected tool yyOutline tool Indicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG). yyArea tool Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or red (NG). If the brightness correction has been set, the inside the tool window will be displayed with the corrected brightness and outside the tool window will be displayed with the brightness before correction.

This is selectable for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has been set. Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same. Selected tool Displays inside the search region with the corrected brightness and outside the search region with the brightness before correction.

Process 1 zz

Outside the tool window Inside the tool window

This is selectable for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has been set. Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same. Selected tool Indicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG). Displays inside the tool window with the corrected brightness and outside the tool window with the brightness before correction.


5-9


This is selectable for the Area tool and for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has not been set. Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same.


Contents of the statistical information are as follows.

Displaying the statistical information When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are displayed. If the [Statistics] button in the [Analysis] is selected, the statistical information of judgment is displayed.

5

Displaying the statistical information

Operating/Adjusting

1 Tap the [View] button. If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu] button at the lower left corner of the monitor.

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(1) Title Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-29), program number (Page 6-7), and program name (Page 6-12). (2) Position adjustment status result When the position adjustment is being set, the position adjustment status result of the latest judgment process will be displayed. (3) Tool status result Displays the status result of the latest judgment process for each tool set in the program.

The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be displayed.

2 Tap the [Statistics] button.

The statistical information will be displayed.

5-10

(4) [Reset] button Resets the statistical information and the histograms. (5) Processing time information Displays information related to the processing time. yyTIME............ Displays the processing time of the latest judgment process. yyMAX............. Displays the maximum value of the processing time. yyMIN.............. Displays the minimum value of the processing time. yyAVE.............. Displays the average value of the processing time. (6) Trigger count information Displays the information related to the number of triggers. yyTrigNo.......... Displays the total number of triggers issued. This number does not include the number of trigger errors. yyOK................ Displays the number of triggers issued with the total status OK. yyNG................ Displays the number of triggers issued with the total status NG. yyTrigErrNo...... Displays the number of triggers issued as error triggers.



(7) OUT information Displays the latest status results of items which are assigned to an output line (OUT1 to OUT4) (Page 4-60).


The system returns to the Menu ON screen.

1 Tap the [View] button. If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu] button at the lower left corner of the monitor. The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be displayed.

2 Tap the [OFF] button in the [Analysis].


yyThe upper limit of TrigNo is 999999. When the number exceeds the upper limit, the counter resets to 0 and starts counting again. yyThe upper limit of OK, NG, and TrigErrNo is 999999. The values display stops updating when the upper limit is reached. yyThe statistical information is reset under the following conditions. - When the [Reset] button is tapped - When the power of the sensor is turned OFF - When the tool is added/deleted/copied - When the upper limit of the Color Area/ Area tool is enabled/disabled or when the setting scale is changed by the operation or Tool Auto Tuning - When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if more than two tools other than the position adjustment tool are being set - When the program is switched - When each correction of the setup adjustment is started - When the sensor is initialized

Hiding the statistical information

The statistical information becomes hidden.




5-11


Contents of the histogram are as follows.

Displaying the histogram When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are displayed. If the [Histogram] button in the [Analysis] is selected, the matching rate of the selected tool is displayed as a histogram.

5

Displaying the histogram

Operating/Adjusting

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu] button at the lower left corner of the monitor.

The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be displayed.

The histogram appears.

(6)

(2) (3)

(7) (8)

(4) (5)

(1) Title Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-29), program number (Page 6-7), and program name (Page 6-12).

1 Tap the [View] button.

2 Tap the [Histogram] button.

(1)

(2) Tool Name Displays the name of the tool whose histogram is been shown. Tap the tool name to select the tool whose histogram is you wish to display. (3) Matching rate information Displays the information related to the matching rate. yyMatch..........Displays the matching rate of the latest judgment process. yyMAX............Displays the maximum value of the matching rate. yyMIN.............Displays the minimum value of the matching rate. yyAVE.............Displays the average value of the matching rate. (4) Judgment Record Displays the judgment process counts for OK or NG. yyOK...............Displays the process count for "OK". yyNG...............Displays the process count for "NG". If the judgment threshold is changed, the histogram is updated according to the result judged based on the changed threshold. However, the judgment record retains the counts judged based on the previous threshold. Therefore, the judgment conditions on the histogram may be different from the displayed judgment record counts. (5) [Reset] button Resets the statistical information and the histograms. (6) Tool status result Displays the status results for the selected tool as OK, NG, or -- (Pos.Adj. fails).

5-12



(7) Threshold Displays the threshold for the selected tool.

yyThe upper limit of the judgment processing count display for the judgment record is 999999. The values display stop updating when the upper limit is reached. yyThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999. The values display stop updating when the upper limit is reached. yyThe histogram and judgement records are reset under the following conditions. - When the [Reset] button is tapped - When the power of the sensor is turned OFF - When the tool is added/deleted/copied - When the upper limit of the Color Area/ Area tool is enabled/disabled or when the setting scale is changed by the operation or Tool Auto Tuning - When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if more than two tools other than the position adjustment tool are being set - When the program is switched - When each correction of the setup adjustment is started - When the sensor is initialized

1 Tap the [View] button. If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu] button at the lower left corner of the monitor. The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be displayed.

2 Tap the [OFF] button in the [Analysis].


(8) Histogram Displays the histogram (frequency distribution) for the selected tool. The range for OK is displayed in green and for NG is displayed in red, having the threshold as the boundary. yyAbscissa axis....Displays the distribution of the matching rate. The display of the range is fixed and cannot be specified arbitrary. yyVertical axis.......Adjusts automatically in accordance with the maximum value of the frequency. It cannot be specified arbitrary. yy .....................Displays the matching rate of the latest judgment process.

Hiding the histogram

The histogram becomes hidden.






5-13

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment The method for manually adjusting the threshold while in the Test mode. The threshold adjustment can be started by the [Limit Adjustment] button in the tool settings of the Settings Navigator.

5 Adjust the threshold by checking the matching rate.

<Setting example> If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 of the value intermediate between 40 and 90.

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

5

“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page 6-7)


Operating/Adjusting

Matching rate

The [Limit Adjustment] button is available only when the program that the tool has been set is selected.

3 If multiple tools are set in the program, select the tool to adjust the threshold from the pulldown menu and tap the [OK] button. Select the tool


4 Image a high or low-quality-target to be the reference of judgment.

If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the button (Page 4-7) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the 5-14

button.

Threshold

yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yyIn accordance with the status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed by using the slider or inputting values. “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14) yyA target is judged by the new threshold from the judgment process of the trigger output after the threshold is changed. yyThe threshold can be adjusted by checking the histogram result. “Displaying the histogram” (Page 5-12) The displayed contents are as follows. - The histogram before threshold adjustment is displayed. - The status results during threshold adjustment are not added to the frequency distribution of the histogram. - The counts for OK and NG are not displayed. - The reset button is not displayed.

6 After the adjustment is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen. If a program is set with more than one tool, a confirmation dialog for whether or not to adjust threshold for other tools is displayed. To adjust threshold for other tools, tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 6.


Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition) The Tool Auto Tuning is a function to automatically adjust the judgment condition for the detection tool and the judgment threshold for each tool by using multiple high-quality-targets (OK images) and lowquality-targets (NG images). There are three methods to the image to be used for Tool Auto Tuning.

Using the image history saved in the „„ sensor

This is the method to the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images read from the Sensor Image History. “Sensor Image History ( Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-14)

Using the images taken in the Test „„ mode


5

Perform tuning by reading the images judged as OK or NG from the Sensor Image History

Using the image files saved in the „„ USB memory

This is the method to the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images read from the USB memory. Batch backup files (*.iva) and image capture files (*.ivp) can be used. “Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-19) “Capturing the screen” (Page 6-23) OK NG OK OK NG

Perform tuning by imaging targets which are judged as OK or NG

USB memory Batch backup file (*.iva) Image capture file (*.ivp)

Perform tuning by reading the images judged as OK or NG from the USB memory


5-15

Operating/Adjusting

This is the method to the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and low-qualitytarget and checking the results of the test operation.


Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning

Displays the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning from the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Start

yyThe position adjustment tool is not a target for Tool Auto Tuning. yyThe Color Area/Area tools with the [Fixed Reference Area] set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool Auto Tuning target.

Select the tool

5


Operating/Adjusting

Select a starting method


2 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.

Image a target

Judgment of an image?

Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning

Low-quality

High-quality When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen opens, tap the [Start] button. AutoTune as OK

AutoTune as NG

3 If multiple tools are set in the program,

select the target tool for Tool Auto Tuning from the pull-down menu, and tap the [OK] button.

Automatically adjust the judgment condition and threshold

Yes

Select the tool

Add image?* The Start Up Menu screen for Tool Auto Tuning opens.

No

Finish * There are three methods to prepare images. * Up to 24 images can be used for tuning. 5-16



Use the ed information file 4 Select a starting method of Tool Auto Tuning. zz

from the beginning zz

5 Select the registration source of the image to be ed to the Tool Auto Tuning and the image.

If the previous registration information has been saved in the monitor, a confirmation dialog asking whether or not to discard the previous registration information appears.

For registration of an image taken during zz the Test mode

“ing the images taken in the Test mode” (Page 5-18)

For registration of an image history saved zz yyTap the [OK] button if you wish to discard the previous registration information and perform Tool Auto Tuning. yyBy tapping the [Saving to the USB memory] button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be saved in the USB memory as a registration information and can be reused.

in the sensor

“ing the images from the image history saved in the sensor” (Page 5-20)

For registration of an image file saved in zz USB memory

“ing the images from the file saved in the USB memory” (Page 5-22)

Use the previous ed image zz Select this method in the following cases. yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after additionally adding a new image to the OK/NG image ed in the previous Tool Auto Tuning yyWhen readjusting the tool settings after Tool Auto Tuning and then repeating the Tool Auto Tuning by the ed image. “Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information” (Page 5-26) - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

5-17


Select this method in the following cases. yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning for the first time. yyWhen redoing the image registration from the beginning. If the [ from the beginning] is tapped, the registration menu screen of Tool Auto Tuning opens. Proceed to step 5.

Select this method in the following cases. yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after additionally adding a new image to the registration information (images and criteria information) saved in the USB memory yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning using the registration information (images and criteria information) saved in the USB memory after readjusting the tool settings “Tool Auto Tuning by the registration information file” (Page 5-28)


6 After the registration is completed, tap the [Save] button.

ing the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning ing the images taken in the Test mode s the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and low-quality-target and checking the images imaged.

5

1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning.


Operating/Adjusting

“Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-16)


2 Tap the [Take a picture] button.

Adjusted results will be reflected and the information dialog appears.


3 Image a high-quality-target to be the

criteria for the OK status or a low-qualitytarget to be the criteria for NG status.

If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the button (Page 4-7) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the button. By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory] button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be saved in the USB memory as a registration information file and can be reused.

4 Check the displayed image and tap the

[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG] button.

For Outline tool zz

The system returns to the Sensor setup menu screen.

The auto tuning will be performed and the OK or NG image will be displayed. 5-18



For Color Area tool (color type) zz

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the reference of judgment again. After the setting is completed, tap the [] button. The auto tuning will be performed and the OK or NG image will be displayed.

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the information screen opens. By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for the brightness extraction area opens. If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the brightness to be the reference of judgment, or operate the slider and expand/reduce the brightness area to be extracted.

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change the brightness of extraction target, tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness to be the reference of judgment again. yyFor details of settings by using the slider, refer to “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14). After the setting is completed, tap the [] button. The auto tuning will be performed and the OK or NG image will be displayed.


5-19


If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the information screen opens. By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for the color extraction area opens. If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the [+]/[-] button and expand/reduce the color area to be extracted.

For Area tool (monochrome type) zz


5 Check the changes in settings after the

auto tuning is performed, and tap the [OK] button.

Changed settings


If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message to change the tool settings or the image to be ed.

ing the images from the image history saved in the sensor s the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images loaded from the Sensor Image History.



2 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button.

The type of an image to be ed will be displayed on the upper right on the screen. yy

: s as an OK image.

yy

: s as an NG image.

The confirmation dialog to continuously another image appears.

6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5.

The Sensor Image history screen opens.

3 Tap the image history to be the OK or NG image and tap the [Zoom] button.

Select the image

yying one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yyUp to 24 images can be ed.

7 After the registration is completed, tap the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.

The system returns to the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning. “Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-16)

5-20

The selected image will be enlarged.

4 Check the displayed image and tap the [AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG] button.

yyBy tapping [<]/[>] button, you can check the other images in enlarged display. yyThe status result displayed on the screen is the status result by the settings at the time of saving the image. If the tool settings are changed after the image is saved, only the frame of the tool window will be displayed regardless of selection of the tool display method (Page 5-7). The processing status will not be displayed.



For Outline tool zz


The auto tuning will be performed and the OK or NG image will be displayed.

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the information screen opens. By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for the color extraction area opens. If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the [+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/ reduce the color area to be extracted.

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the reference of judgment again.


After the setting is completed, tap the [] button. The auto tuning will be performed and the OK or NG image will be displayed.


5-21







Changed settings


If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message to change the tool settings or the image to be ed. The type of an image to be ed will be displayed on the upper right on the screen. yy

: s as an OK image.

yy

: s as an NG image.

ing the images from the file saved in the USB memory s the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images loaded from the USB memory.

1 Connect the USB memory on which the

batch backup files (*.iva) and image capture files (*.ivp) are saved, to the USB connector of the monitor. “Installing the USB memory” (Page 6-18)



3 Tap the [USB Memory Image] button.


6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5. yying one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yyUp to 24 images can be ed.

The USB Memory Image screen opens.

7 After the registration is completed, tap the 4 Select a batch backup file (*.iva) or image [No] button on the confirmation dialog. The system returns to the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning. “Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-16)

capture file (*.ivp) and tap the [OK] button.

Select a file to be loaded

File formats other than “*.iva” or “*.ivp” cannot be loaded. For details of selecting files in the USB memory, refer to “Selecting the file in the USB memory” (Page 3-17).

5-22



5 When the batch backup file (*.iva) is

selected, tap the image history to be the OK or NG image and tap the [Zoom] button.


Select the image

The selected image will be enlarged.

[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG] button.

yyWhen a batch backup file (*.iva) has been selected, you can check the other images in enlarged display by tapping the [<]/[>] button. yyThe status result displayed on the screen for the batch backup file (*.iva) is the status result by the settings at the time of saving the image. yyFor the image capture file (*.ivp), only the image will be displayed.

For Outline tool zz

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the reference of judgment again.

The auto tuning will be performed and the OK or NG image will be displayed.

After the setting is completed, tap the [] button. The auto tuning will be performed and the OK or NG image will be displayed.


5-23


6 Check the displayed image and tap the

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the information screen opens. By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for the color extraction area opens. If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the [+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/ reduce the color area to be extracted.







Changed settings

If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message to change the tool settings or the image to be ed. The type of an image to be ed will be displayed on the upper right on the screen. yy

: s as an OK image.

yy

: s as an NG image.


8 Tap the [Yes] button and the images repeatedly.


5-24

yyIf the batch backup file (*.iva) is selected, repeat steps 5 to 7. yyIf the image capture file (*.ivp) is selected, repeat steps 4 to 7. yying one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yyUp to 24 images can be ed.

9 After the registration is completed, tap the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.

The system returns to the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning. “Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-16)



Confirming or deleting the images ed for the Tool Auto Tuning Confirm or delete the OK/NG images ed for the Tool Auto Tuning.

1 Display the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.


5

2 Tap the [Confirmation of ed Image]

Operating/Adjusting

button.

3 Confirm or delete the OK/NG image.

yy[First].................Displays the first image. yy[<]......................Displays the previous image. yy[>]......................Displays the next image. yy[Last].................Displays the last image. yy[Delete]..............Deletes the displayed image. The setting is re-adjusts by using the remaining images.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [Close] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.


5-25


Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information


When the information of Tool Auto Tuning performed before turning off power of the monitor or before disconnecting with the sensor (previous registration information) is used, the Tool Auto Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG image registration process. yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/ NG image ed with the previous Tool Auto Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning. yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the ed image.




When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen opens, tap the [Start] button.


select the target tool for the Tool Auto Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap the [OK] button. Select the tool

Previous registration information OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

OK

The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens.

Tuning based on the OK/NG images ed in the previous Tool Auto Tuning

The previous registration information is saved in the memory (RAM) inside the monitor, and remains available until the power of the monitor is turned off or the monitor is disconnected with the sensor. When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning using the same previous registration information, settings might be changed each time being performed. This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning consistently performs adjustment based on the latest settings (settings changed immediately before).

5-26



4 Tap the [Use the previous ed image] 7 After the registration is completed, tap the button.

[Save] button.

Re-adjustment is performed by using the previous registration information.


5 Check the changes made by

the re-adjustment and tap the [OK] button.


Operating/Adjusting

The information dialog appears.

5

The adjustment result is reflected and the information dialog appears.


Changed settings

The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens.

6 To add images, the OK/NG images. “ing the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-18)

By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory] button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be saved in the USB memory as a registration information file and can be reused. The system returns to the Sensor setup menu screen.


5-27


Tool Auto Tuning by the registration information file


When the registration information file (*.ivt), which contains the Tool Auto Tuning images and criteria information saved at the end of the previous Tool Auto Tuning is used, the Tool Auto Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG image registration process. yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/ NG images ed with the previous Tool Auto Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning. yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the ed image.

USB memory ed information file (*.ivt) OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

1 Prepare the registration information file (*.ivt).

A registration information file is saved at the Tool Auto Tuning finish screen. For the saving method, refer to the step 8 of “Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-16).




When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen opens, tap the [Start] button.


select the target tool for the Tool Auto Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap the [OK] button.

OK

Select the tool

Tuning based on the OK/NG images in the registration information file

This is the function for the monitor operation software version R1.10 or later. For the versions older than R1.10, update the software to the latest version. When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning using the same registration information file, settings might be changed each time being performed. This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning consistently performs adjustment based on the latest settings (settings changed immediately before).

5-28

The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens.



5 Tap the [Use the ed information file] 7 Tap the [Go] button. button.

The import screen for registration information file appears.

Re-adjustment is performed by using the ed information file.


6 Select the ed information file (*.ivt) and tap the [OK] button.

Select the file to be imported

The information dialog appears.

8 Check the changes made by the re-

adjustment and tap the [OK] button.

yyFiles with the formats other than ivt format cannot be used. yyIf the confirmation dialog appears, change the registration file to be imported according to the message. yyFor the monitor operation software version R1.10, this file cannot be use. Update the software to the latest version. For details of selecting the files in the USB memory, refer to “Selecting the file in the USB memory” (Page 3-17). The confirmation screen opens.

Changed settings

The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens.

9 To add images, the OK/NG images. “ing the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-18)


5-29


10 After the registration is completed, tap the [Save] button.

5


Operating/Adjusting


Adjusted results will be reflected and the information dialog appears.


By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory] button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be saved in the USB memory as a registration information and can be reused. The system returns to the Sensor setup menu screen.

5-30



MEMO



5-31

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

Stabilizing the Judgment Process This section explains how to adjust the device when the judgment process is not stable. To stabilize the judgment process, it is necessary to take a clear image of the target and adjust the detection tool such that it functions in a stable manner.


yyStabilize the judgment process by clearly imaging the target (Page 5-32) - Adjust the installation distance to image the target widely - Correct the distorted image due to the installation - Make the image bright enough - Focus well - Make the image blur less - Make the glossy or metal surface shine less - Adjust the color tint (for color type only) - Make the image less influenced by the lighting condition yyStabilize by adjusting the position gap of the target (Page 5-36) yyStabilize the position adjustment (Page 5-37) yyStabilize the Outline tool (Page 5-38) yyStabilize the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-39)

Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target Adjust the imaging conditions so that the sensor can take images with which the detection tools can clearly recognize differences between high and low-qualitytarget.

Imaging the target widely The judgment process stabilizes by taking a large image of the target onto the screen.

Adjusting the installed distance (WD) „„ Install the sensor close to the target. Install the sensor at the appropriate distance from the target upon checking the field of view and the installed distance of the sensor. “Checking the view and installed distance” (Page 2-2)

¡ : Adequate

× : Inadequate

If the judgment process is adjusted to make it stabilize, the process time may become longer depending on the function used. Adjust the judgment process while confirming the balance within the process time.

Using the digital zooming function „„ For the monochrome type, the target can be imaged larger using the digital zooming function. “Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)” (Page 4-19)

5-32



Correcting the distorted images due to the installation If the sensor is not installed just in front of the target due to the sensor installation restrictions and/or to prevent a shine on the target’s surface, the target image may become trapezoidally distorted. The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion. “Tilt Correction” (Page 6-38)

Achieving adequate image brightness If the image is too dark, the judgment process for high and low-quality-targets becomes unstable due to poor contrast. Also, if the image is too bright, the judgment process may become unstable. Brightness can be adjusted in Auto Brightness Adjustment. “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11)

If the brightness cannot be adjusted „„

Indicator light

Top view Target

Finer brightness adjustments can be made in Advanced Brightness Adjustment. “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-18)

Target

Lateral view

Bright zz Setting a higher brightness value gives a longer exposure time, resulting in a brighter screen. Before tilt correction

After tilt correction (vertical)

Imaging Mode zz When "HighGain" is selected in the imaging mode, the brightness amplification factor increases and the screen becomes brighter.

If the brightness cannot be adjusted „„ due to uneven brightness

Refer to “Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface” (Page 5-35).


5-33


in the Auto Brightness Adjustment


Achieving good focus

Reducing the image blur

Adjusting the focus is required to clearly image of the target. For the auto focus type, focus can be adjusted easily in the Auto Focus Adjustment. For the manual focus type, the focus can be adjusted while confirming the image and focus indicator. “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12)

5

If the image is blurred by imaging a moving target, the image blurring can be corrected by shortening the exposure time (shutter time). Adjust the exposure time with the advanced brightness adjustment. “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-18)

If good focus cannot be achieved by „„ the Auto Focus Adjustment

Operating/Adjusting

The focusing position may not be adjusted correctly if the image is too dark or too bright. Adjust to the applicable brightness with Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) and then perform the auto focus adjustment. If the focus still cannot be adjusted with the auto focus adjustment for the auto focus type, adjust the focus manually. “When the focusing position is to be adjusted manually” (Page 4-13)

Exposure time

Bright zz When the value of brightness is reduced, the exposure time becomes shorter resulting in a less blurry image.

Imaging Mode zz Select [HighGain] in the imaging mode so that the brightness gain becomes higher. The screen becomes brighter so that the exposure time can be shortened and the image blurring can be reduced. The image noise may increase. Also, the exposure time may be shortened if the [HDR] is selected in the imaging mode.

Adjust the focus position by tapping the [+] or [-] button.

5-34

By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing filter attachment, image blurring can be lessened as the exposure time can be shortened.



Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface Glossy and/or metal surface may reflect the built-in light into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a high-light intensity, the amount of light received will be saturated and the surface will shine. This section explains how to reduce the shininess.

Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment „„

Use the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/ OP-87437). The optical characteristics of the polarizing filter attachment cut off the mirror reflection and reduce the shine on the target’s surface. “Using the polarizing filter attachment” (Page 2-7)

Installing the sensor at an angle „„ The built-in lighting will not reflected back into the camera, so the shine on the target’s surface can be reduced. This is effective for flat-surface targets. When the sensor is installed in front of the target

When the sensor is installed at an angle from the target

Using the dome attachment „„ Use the dome attachment (IV-D10). The dome attachment emits even diffused light from the entire circumference to the target, so that the contrast becomes less and the shine on the target’s surface is reduced. This is effective for targets of all shapes. “Using the dome attachment” (Page 2-6)

Dome attachment

The mirror reflection of the built-in light reflects into the camera and causes the surface to shine.

The mirror reflection of the built-in light does not reflect into the camera so no surface shine occurs.

If the image is distorted by tilting the sensor, the image can be corrected by the tilt correction function. “Tilt Correction” (Page 6-38)

Diffusion light

Target


5-35


If the target shines, the HDR function is enabled automatically and it can be reduced by using the auto brightness adjustment. The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function is a function that prevents light saturation in the shining area by imaging the target with a wider dynamic range. The HDR function can also be adjusted manually. “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-18)

Using the polarizing filter attachment „„


Adjusting the color tint (for color type only) Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color type image is different from that of the target. “White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-41)

Reducing the effect of illumination variation


If the detection is not stable due to the ambient light from the surroundings where the sensor is installed, the effect of the illumination variation can be reduced by the brightness correction function. If the detection cannot be stabilized with the brightness correction function, use a shielding around the sensor to prevent from the ambient light. “Brightness correction” (Page 4-26)

Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly. The detection can be stabilized by using the position adjusting function. “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-51)

Tool settings „„ Master image

Tool window Position adjustment window

Processing during an operation „„ Position adjustment process

Tool window Position adjustment window Search region of the tool window

5-36



Stabilizing the position adjustment This section explains how to adjust when the position adjustment is not stable. “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-51)

If the target tilts and the position „„ adjustment becomes unstable Search region Rotation range

Basic adjustments „„ Set the position adjustment window as large as possible by selecting a part that contains a unique shape. If there are many variation of a target shapes that a position adjustment window has been set, set the threshold which has lower matching rate.


Since the convex part assigned in the position adjustment window does not exist in any other part of the target, the position adjustment can be performed correctly without being recognition error.

× : Bad example

yyBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target exceeds the rotation range (default value: ± 20°). “Rotation Range” (Page 4-57) yyTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search ± few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.) Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target. “Margin” (Page 4-57)

Search Region zz Broaden the search region if the variation in the position determining of the target exceeds the region to be searched. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-55)

Example 1 Example 2

If the position adjustment becomes „„ unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines


The position adjustment cannot function correctly in the following examples. Example 1: The straight line that the position adjustment window is set cannot be identified uniquely because there are many similar straight lines exist in other parts of the target. Example 2: The angle section that the position adjustment window is set cannot be identified uniquely because there are many similar angle sections exist in other parts of the target.

yyThe outline disabling function can disable unwanted outlines. “Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-55) yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low]. “Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-56)


5-37

Operating/Adjusting

¡ : Good example

5

Rotation Range zz


If the outline of the reference target „„ cannot be detected


yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not be extracted. Set the extraction sensitivity to [High]. “Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-56) If the process remain unstable even after setting the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is necessary to adjust the exposure condition for the target. “Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target” (Page 5-32) yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may become stable by using the color filter. “Color Filters (color type only)” (Page 4-19)

Stabilizing the Outline tool This section explains how to adjust the outline tool when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets is not stable. “Outline tool” (Page 4-32)

Basic adjustments „„ yySet the tool window as large as possible by selecting a part contains a unique shape. yyIf the same or similar shapes are misrecognized, set the search region so that no outlines are searched beyond the target area. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-35) yyAdjust the threshold to the average of the high and low-quality-target. The judgment condition and threshold can also be optimized automatically to the most appropriate condition and value by using the Tool Auto Tuning. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14) “Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)

If the outline cannot be detected when „„ the target becomes out of position

Adjust the search region. Broaden the search region if the varies of the position determining of the target exceeds the region to be searched. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-35)

If the detection becomes unstable due „„ to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target

yyThe outline disabling function can disable unwanted outlines. “Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-35) yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low]. “Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-36) yySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-35) yySet the search algorithm to [High Accuracy]. “Search Algorithm” (Page 4-38) yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc.

5-38



If the target tilts and the outline „„ cannot be detected

If the match rate difference between the „„ high and low-quality-targets is small

Adjust the search algorithm. If there is no difference between the match rate for high and low-quality-target, select the [High Accuracy]. This will result in better judgment accuracy. However, the processing time becomes longer. “Search Algorithm” (Page 4-38)

If the outline of the target cannot be „„ detected

yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not be extracted. Set the extraction sensitivity to [High]. “Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-36) If the process remain unstable even after setting the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is necessary to adjust the exposure condition for the target. “Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target” (Page 5-32) yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may become stable by using the color filter. “Color Filters (color type only)” (Page 4-19)

This section explains how to adjust the Color Area/ Area tool when the judgment for the high and lowquality-target is not stable. “Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-40)

Basic adjustments „„ Adjust the threshold to the average of the high and low-quality-target. The color extraction range, brightness extraction range and threshold can also be optimized automatically to the most appropriate ranges and values by using the tool auto tuning. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14) “Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)

If the color you wish to judge cannot „„ be extracted

yyTap and extract the color or the brightness to be the reference for judgment. y y By repeatedly tapping the un-extracted color or brightness, the extraction range can be added. yyAdjust the extraction range with the extraction range zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons). Tap the [+] button to expand the color or brightness range currently being extracted. Tap the [-] button to reduce the range. “Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42) yySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable]. “Extended functions of the Color Area/ Area tool” (Page 4-48)

If the area search becomes unstable „„

due to unwanted colors being extracted Adjust with the mask function. The region in which unwanted colors are extracted can be disabled. “Mask settings” (Page 4-45)


5-39


yyAdjust the rotation range. Broaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target exceeds the rotation range (default value: ± 20°). “Rotation Range” (Page 4-38) yyTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will search with the range ± few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search ± few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.) Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target. “Margin” (Page 4-37)

Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool

Shortening the Processing Time



This section explains how to adjust the device to shorten the processing time. To shorten the processing time, perform adjustments to shorten the processing times of the imaging process and the detection tools. yyShorten the imaging processing time (Page 5-41) yyShorten the processing time of the detection tools (Page 5-41) yyShorten the processing time of the Outline tool (Page 5-41) yyShorten the processing time of the Color Area/ Area tool (Page 5-42) yyShorten the processing time of the position adjustment (Page 5-42)

For the processing time The processing time is the period of time from when an external or internal trigger is received until the status result is finalized. The processing time is displayed at the upper right of the run screen or the test screen. Processing time

Flow of the internal process „„ If the processing time is shortened, the stability of judgment may decrease. The processing time should therefore be adjusted with a view of maintaining balance with the stability of the judgment process.

Trigger input

Imaging

(Tilt Correction) (Brightness Correction) (Position Adjustment)

Processing time

Tool 1 process

Tool 2 process

Tool n process

Status output

Methods to shorten the processing time are as follows. yyShortening the imaging processing time. yyShortening the processing time of each tool. yyDo not use correction functions (tilt correction, brightness correction, and position adjustment). yyDo not use the FTP client function. yyDo not use a field network. 5-40



Shortening the imaging processing time Imaging Area zz The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the imaging area. Entire imaging area (default value) Reduce the imaging area

Shortening the processing time of each tool Shortening the processing time of the Outline tool The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the settings for the search region, rotation range, and search algorithm. Search region

5

Rotation range

Operating/Adjusting

Non-imaged area

Reduce the imaging area by setting the imaging area from Entire (default value) to Partial. The processing time for capturing the image in Nonimaged area can be shortened. The importing time will be shortened by narrowing the vertical direction (V). “Imaging Area” (Page 4-17)

Exposure Time zz

Search Region zz

The searching time can be shortened by reducing the search region and setting the region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial]. Make sure that the range of position determining of the target does not exceed the search region. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-35)

Rotation Range zz

The processing time can be shortened by shortening the exposure time (Page 4-18). The longer exposure time makes the processing time longer than the displayed exposure time. By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing filter attachment, the exposure time can be shortened.

Selecting the tool

The target search time while rotating the master image can be shortened by reducing the rotation range (default value: ± 20°). Make sure that the range of an installation angle of the target does not exceed the rotation range. “Rotation Range” (Page 4-38)

Search Algorithm zz

Select the [High Speed]. This will decrease the judgment accuracy, but the processing time will be shorter. “Search Algorithm” (Page 4-38)

Producing an image with less unwanted zz

The processing time of the Color Area/Area tool will be shorter than the Outline tool. Therefore, you should select the Color Area/Area tool whenever possible.

outlines

The processing time becomes longer for images with multiple unwanted outlines other than the target outlines. yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc. yySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-35)


5-41


Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool

Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment

The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the window shape settings.

When the position adjustment is performed, the processing time can be shortened by adjusting the search region settings or rotation range settings.

Window shape

Search region Rotation range


Window Shape zz If the current window shape is [Entire], reduce the window shape by modifying the setting to [¨ Rect] or [¡ Circle]. The processing time can be shortened by reducing the time required for the area processing. “Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42)

Search Region zz The searching time can be shortened by reducing the search region and setting the region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial]. Note that the range of the target position that the position adjustment function can correct becomes narrower. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-55)

Rotation Range zz The target search time while rotating the master image can be shortened by reducing the rotation range (default value: ± 20°). Note that the range of the target angle that the position adjustment function can correct becomes narrower. “Rotation Range” (Page 4-57)

Producing an image with less zz unnecessary outlines

The processing time becomes longer for images with multiple unwanted outlines other than the target outlines. yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc. yySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-55)

5-42


6


This chapter explains the useful features of the sensor and the monitor. The Sensor Setup Menu screen, the Sensor Advanced screen, and the Monitor Settings screen are also explained.


6-1

6 Useful Features/Various Functions

List of the Useful Features................................6-2 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen.....6-7 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)..........................................6-8 Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG).........6-14 Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory................................6-18 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor.........................................................6-25 Setting the Advanced Monitor Information....6-45

List of the Useful Features

List of the Useful Features Useful features while running Items

Things you want to do


Analysis

Reference page

Up to 32 types (products) of products can be ed and loaded.

6-8

Assign a name to the settings of each product for easy Program function identification

A name can be assigned to the used program.

6-12

Prevent misoperation by the operator

Misoperation can be prevented by yy Lock yyTouch Screen Lock setting a on the monitor.

6-30 6-50

Assign a name to each sensor for easy identification

Device Name

A device name and a study name can be assigned to the sensor.

6-29

Automatically the master image

External master registration

s the master image from external input.

6-26

Automatically save and confirm the NG images


The latest 100 images (in color) or 300 images (in monochrome) can be saved into the memory of the sensor and confirmed them.

6-14

Confirm the image history in the sensor saved as a batch backup file (*.iva).

The sensor image history can Simulator functions be confirmed by opening the of IV-Navigator batch backup file.

Specify a screen and save it to a USB memory

Screen Capture

Tap the title on the desired screen to capture it.

6-23

Check the operation status statistically

Statistical process screen

The statistical data of the processing times and results can be confirmed.

5-10

Check the operation status with a histogram

Histogram screen

The status result of each tool can be displayed in the histogram screen.

5-12

FTP client function

Data of the images captured by the sensor and the status result information can be automatically transferred to an FTP server.

6-32

Automatically save data of the images captured by the sensor and the status result information outside the sensor

6-2

Description

Program function

Change over the program

Operation

Useful functions


1-5


Items


Useful functions

Description

Reference page

The menu and title can be hidden and the image will be displayed in full-screen.

5-5

Zoom in/out the images

Zoom button

The zoom ratio can be changed to x 1/x 1.5/x 2/x 3.

5-6

Adjust the brightness of the backlight

Backlight

The brightness of the backlight can be adjusted between 7 levels.

6-52

Dim the backlight when not in use

Backlight

The monitor can be set to dim automatically when not used for a specific period of time.

6-52

Change the display language Language

The language can be changed to Japanese, English, Deutsch, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Italian, French, Spanish, Portuguese or Korean.

6-51

Hide the trigger button

The [Trig] button displayed when the external trigger is selected can be hidden.

6-49

If the image is not need to be displayed, the screen update can become faster by setting to display the status result only.

6-49

Display

Manual Trigger

Update Image in Make the screen update faster RUN Mode


6-3


Confirm images hidden under Zoom button the menu or title


Useful features during installation/adjustment Items

Stabilize the detection Judgment Shorten the process time process Issue an internal trigger and perform judgment process within the shortest cycle

6

Adjust the threshold for the Threshold detection by using the saved images

Useful Features/Various Functions

Prevent internal lighting from blinking

Imaging

6-4

Description

Reference page

-

Adjusts the sensor installation and the settings navigator.

5-32

-

Adjusts the settings navigator.

5-40

-

Sets the trigger interval to 1ms.

7-3

Tool Auto Tuning

The threshold can be set automatically by selecting an image and specifying to OK or NG.

5-15

The light can be set to stay lit at Continuous lighting all times by synchronizing with the trigger.

4-18


Useful functions

Tilt Correction

The distorted images due to the limitations for the sensor installation can be corrected and displayed correctly.

6-38

Adjust the color tint (white balance)

White Balance

The color tint can be adjusted and displayed correctly.

6-41

Correct the images of a target that are rotated 180°

Rotate 180°

The image of a target can be rotated 180° without adjusting the sensor's position.

6-40

Correct the distorted images due to being taken from an angle



Items

Useful functions

Description

Reference page

Confirm/edit the settings or confirm the operation results without connecting to the sensor.

The settings can be confirmed or edited by using a batch Simulator functions backup files (*.iva). Also, of IV-Navigator the operation results can be simulated.

Back up the settings to the USB memory

Batch Backup

The settings for the sensor can be read and saved into the USB memory.

6-19

Copy the settings to multiple sensors

Transfer Program Settings

The batch backup data stored into the USB memory can be transferred to another sensor.

6-21

Copy the settings and use the settings to set another product

Program function

The settings of a set program number which has been set can be copied to another program number.

6-12

Confirm the settings of the sensor with the list.

Export functions of IV-Navigator

The list of settings can be confirmed with Microsoft Excel etc.

1-5

Initialize the settings of the sensor

Initialize Sensor

The settings can be initialized to the factory default.

6-44

Initialize the settings of the monitor

Initialize Monitor

The settings can be initialized to the factory default.

6-53

Confirm the version of the sensor

Sensor Information

The version for the model or the operation software can be confirmed.

6-43

Confirm the version of the monitor

The version for the model or Monitor Information the operation software can be confirmed.

6-53


1-5

6-5


Settings



Items

Description

Reference page

The operation test for the input and output line can be performed.

6-28

Switch to NPN output or PNP Polarity output

The polarity can be changed to NPN or PNP according to the controlling device used.

6-28

Switch the output to N.O. or N.C. Output Settings

The settings for each OUT can be changed to N.O. or N.C.

6-27

Output the status output with one-shot

Common Output Settings

The output can be changed from latching output to oneshot output.

6-27

Output the status output with on-delay


On-delay time can be set for the one-shot output.

6-27

Switch the external trigger to rise or fall

Input Settings

Rising trigger or falling trigger can be selected as the operation of the external trigger

6-26

Output the NG status results

Total status NG output

When the total status result of each detection tool was NG, the total status NG output function turns ON.

4-60

Confirm whether or not the sensor is running properly

RUN output

When the sensor is running with no system error occurring, the output function turns ON.

4-60

Form a logical operation of status result

Logic output

Logical operation result of each detection tool can be assigned to the output function.

4-63

Change the total status conditions

Total status conditions

The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK]/ [Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

4-65

Things you want to do Confirm whether or not the input and output lines are correctly wired


I/O lines

6-6

Useful functions I/O Monitor


Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen This section explains the Sensor Setup Menu screen, which is displayed by tapping the [Setup] button when the menu display of the monitor is ON.

1 Set the menu display of the monitor ON and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

(2) [Detail] button By tapping the [Detail] button, the Program Details screen opens. The master image can be confirmed and the program name can be edited. “Editing a program name” (Page 6-12) “Copying a program” (Page 6-12) “Initializing a program” (Page 6-13) (3) Master image Displays the master image ed to the currently selected program. If no master image is ed, the [No Master Image] will be displayed. (4) [Sensor Setup] button Start the Settings Navigator. “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1) (5) [Limit Adjustment] button Adjusts the threshold of the tool ed in the currently selected program. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14)


(6) [Tool Auto Tuning] button Performs the auto tuning of the tool ed in the currently selected program. “Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15) The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. The displayed items are as follows. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(1) Program Displays the program number of the selected program. The program can be switched from the pull-down menu. “Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page 6-8)

(7) [Sensor Advanced] button Performs the advanced settings for the sensor. “Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor” (Page 6-25) (8) [Sensor Image History] button Displays the image history saved in the sensor. “Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-14) (9) [USB Memory] button Operates the USB memory connected to the monitor. “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory” (Page 6-18) (10) [RUN] button Starts running the sensor. “Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)


6-7



Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions) Overview of the program functions The sensor can save the judgment condition set in the settings navigator as a program up to 32 types (32 products). By reading the judgment condition which has been saved according to each product, changeover can be done easily. Sensor PROG31 : Product XX •••

6

PROG02 : Product C

Things can be performed with the program functions yySaves 32 types (32 products) of judgment conditions (programs). “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1) yyReads and operates the saved program. “Using the program functions (changing over)” (Page 6-10) yySelects the reading method of the program. “Program Switch Method” (Page 6-42) yyNames the judgment conditions (programs). “Editing a program name” (Page 6-12)


PROG01 : Product B

yyCopies and uses the judgment conditions (programs). “Copying a program” (Page 6-12)

PROG00 : Product A Settings Navigator *1 yyImaging settings yyMaster image *2 yyTool settings yyOutput Assignment

yyReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to the status before setting. “Initializing a program” (Page 6-13)

Sensor Advanced yyEnvironmental yySetup Adjustment yySwitching programs *1 *2

6-8

The auto focus type includes the focusing position. Including the threshold of each tool.



Preparing the program functions s the judgment condition for each product to the program before running.

Preparation flow (1) Select a program number Select a program number to a judgment condition from PROG00 to PROG31.

Preparation procedures



2 Select a program number to a judgment condition of a product.

(2) Set a judgment condition in the Settings Navigator Set the judgment condition for a product in the Settings Navigator.

The following functions can be used with the preparations for the program function. yyThe product name can be ed to the program. “Editing a program name” (Page 6-12) yyTo a similar product, the program can be copied, and then the settings can be edited. “Copying a program” (Page 6-12) yyInitializes and returns the judgment condition ed in the program to the status before setting. “Initializing a program” (Page 6-13)

6 The program can also be selected from the [Detail] button (Page 6-7).

3 Set a judgment condition in the Settings Navigator.

“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to programs for the number of products that are to be changed over.


6-9


(3) Select a program switch method Select a switch method. There are methods such as switching from the external input line or switching by tapping the monitor.

Select the program


5 Select a program switch method.

Using the program functions (changing over) When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in the Program Switch Method



“Program Switch Method” (Page 6-42) yyMonitor/PC........Switching by tapping the monitor screen or operating from the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) or the field network. yyExternal IN........Switching by inputting signals from PLC to the input line of the sensor.


2 Select the program number that the product to be judged is ed.

Select the program

6 If the [External IN] is selected in the

program switch method, set the input terminal.

“Input Settings” (Page 6-26) The bit to be set differs depending on the product numbers to be ed. Product numbers to be ed (Program numbers) 2

bit to be assigned to the input line

3 Tap the [RUN] button and the run mode will start with the new program.

bit0

3 to 4

bit0/bit1

5 to 8

bit0/bit1/bit2

9 to 16

bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3

17 to 32

bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4

Setup example When 7 types of products are to be ed, bit0, bit1, and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN terminals. bit3 and bit4 are not assigned.

6-10

The program number can also be selected while confirming a master image with the [Detail] button (Page 6-7).

For details of how to switch from the IV-Navigator (IV-H1), refer to "IV Series 's Manual (PC Software)".



When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method

1 Start the run mode.

“Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)

2 Select the program number to which the product to be judged is ed with the status of the input line.

Change the input lines IN2 to IN6 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings (Page 6-26) to the following statuses and maintain the settings. Start the run mode with the new program number. Program number

bit4 (MSB)

bit3

bit2

bit1

bit0 (LSB)

Program number

PROG00

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

PROG16

bit4 (MSB) ON

bit3

bit2

bit1

bit0 (LSB)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

PROG17

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

PROG18

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

PROG03

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

PROG19

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

PROG04

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

PROG20

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

PROG05

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PROG21

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PROG06

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

PROG22

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

PROG07

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

PROG23

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

PROG08

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

PROG24

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

PROG09

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

PROG25

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

PROG10

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

PROG26

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

PROG11

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

PROG27

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

PROG12

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PROG28

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PROG13

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

PROG29

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

PROG14

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

PROG30

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

PROG15

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

PROG31

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [NPN] yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [PNP]

ON : OFF : ON : OFF :

the state shorted with 0 V line Open the state that voltage is applied Open

For details of the controlling method and the timing chart, refer to


“Changing Over” (Page 7-7).

6-11


PROG01 PROG02


Editing a program name

Copying a program

Tap the [Detail] button in the Sensor Setup Menu screen and edit the program name.

Copies a set program to another program number. Re-uses the set items and creates a new program.



2 Tap the [Detail] button.


3 Select the program to change the name

3 Select the program number to be copied


The Program Details screen opens.

and tap the [Edit] button.

6



and tap the [Copy] button.


Select the program

The selected program can be moved by tapping the [<] or [>] button. The screen to edit the program name opens.

4

Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK] button.

Select the program

The selected program can be moved by tapping the [<] or [>] button.

4 Select the program number to be the copy destination and tap the [Go] button.

Select the program number

For details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16). The system returns to the Program Details screen. If the display language (Page 6-51) is changed, the program name might be replaced and displayed as hyphens (-).

The copy source program is copied to the copy destination. Copied program

6-12



Initializing a program Initializes settings in the program and resets to the default.





3 Select the program to be initialized and tap the [Initialize] button.


Select the program

The selected program can be moved by tapping the [<] or [>] button. The confirmation dialog appears.


The system returns to the Program Details screen. The initialized program becomes [No Master Image].


6-13

Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)

Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) The sensor has a built-in memory for saving images used for judgment. According to the saving condition, it automatically saves the latest images. The saving conditions are as follows. yyNG images only (default value).... Saves the images whose total status result was NG. yyAll images..................................... Saves all the images that were judged. Loads the saved images into the monitor and the images can be used for confirming the causes and tendency of the NG result. The numbers of images can be saved are as follows. yyColor type...................... 100 images yyMonochrome type.......... 300 images The number of images which can be saved when using the FTP client function are as follows. yyColor type...................... 70 images yyMonochrome type.......... 210 images


Since the memory of the sensor image history is volatile, all saved images are erased when the power is turned OFF. To save the images, batch back up the images into a USB memory.

Displaying the Sensor Image History screen This section explains how to display the Sensor Image History screen. There are two methods for displaying the Sensor Image History screen. The [Logging Settings] can be set only when it is displayed from the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying from the run screen „„

1

Tap the [Sensor Image History] button when the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.

The Sensor Image History screen opens.

6-14

Displaying from the Sensor Setup „„ Menu screen

1 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button in the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

The Sensor Image History screen opens.



Loading and confirming the saved images

The View screen opens. (1)

Displays the image history in the sensor.

1 2

(2)

Display the Sensor Image History screen. “Displaying the Sensor Image History screen” (Page 6-14)

Tap the [View] button.

(3) (4) (5)

(6)

(7)

(1) Page number Indicates the page number of the image history.

When displaying from the run screen, the confirmation dialog appears. Select whether or not to pause. When the operation is not paused yyThe added or overwritten history image will not be updated automatically. For updating, close the history image display once and then display it again. yyWhen the history image is erased by overwriting and updating in the sensor during displaying on the monitor, it may not be displayed again on the monitor.

For details of the number of triggers, refer to “Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10). (3) Detailed information Displays the detailed information for the selected thumbnail image. Displays the program number, program name, number of triggers, status results for the position adjustment, and the status results for each tool. (4) Operation buttons Selects a thumbnail image. yy[First].................Moves to the first page of the image history. yy[<<]....................Moves to the previous page. yy[<]......................Moves to the previous history. yy[>]......................Moves to the next history. yy[>>]....................Moves to the next page. yy[Last].................Moves to the last page of the image history. (5) [Batch Backup] button Backs up the images in a batch. “Saving the sensor settings or the image history” (Page 6-19) To back up the images in a batch from the View screen, the saving target will be [Prog.+Image Hist.].


6-15


(2) Thumbnail images Displays the number of triggers, total status result, and thumbnail image.


(6) [View] button Zooms in on the selected image history on the monitor.

Clearing the saved images Clears the image histories saved in the sensor.

1 Display the Sensor Image History screen. “Displaying the Sensor Image History screen” (Page 6-14)

2 Tap the [Clear] button.

6

yy[<] button Moves to the previous history.


yy[>] button Moves to the next history. yy[Save to USB Memory] button Saves the displayed image to the USB memory. “Saving the image history individually” (Page 6-20) yy[Auto Tuning] button Performs auto tuning based on the displayed history. “Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)



The image history will be cleared and the system returns to the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

yyTitle Displays the program number, program name and number of triggers. In the following cases, characters of the title are displayed in yellow. yyImages which the tool settings was changed after image history saving yyWhen Tool Auto Tuning has been performed Moreover, if [Process 1] / [Process 2] / [Process] is selected for Tool View (Page 5-7), only the tool window is displayed and the process contents are not displayed. (7) [Back] button The system returns to the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

6-16



Changing the logging conditions of the image history Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for the image history.

1 Display the Sensor Image History screen. Display the Sensor Image History screen from the Sensor Setup Menu screen. The [Logging Settings] can be set only when it is selected from the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

6

“Displaying the Sensor Image History screen” (Page 6-14)


2 Tap the [Logging Settings] button.

3 Select a logging condition.

yyAll......................Saves all the images to the image history regardless of the status result. yyNG only.............Only saves the images whose status result is NG to the image history.


The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen.


6-17

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory Connect the USB memory to the monitor so that the data backup, settings data transfer, and screen capture can be performed.

Installing/Removing the USB memory Installing the USB memory

1 Open the cover of the USB connecting connector on the monitor.

6

2 Connect the USB memory to the USB

Displaying the USB Memory screen This section explains how to display the USB Memory screen. There are two methods for displaying the USB Memory screen. The items can be set are the same for the two methods.

Displaying from the run screen „„

1 Tap the [USB Memory] button with the state that the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.

connector.


The USB Memory screen opens.

ed formats : FAT (FAT16) / FAT32

Removing the USB memory The USB memory can be removed at any time, except while a progress bar or a diadicating that a saving process is in progress is being displayed.

1 Remove the USB memory from the USB connecting connector.

The [Batch Backup] button and [Transfer Program Settings] button are available only when the USB memory is attached.

Displaying from the Sensor Setup „„ Menu screen

1 Tap the [USB Memory] button in the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

The USB Memory screen opens. 6-18



Saving the sensor settings or the image history Backing up in a batch Backs up the data saved in the sensor into the USB memory in a batch. When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings can be copied based on the batch backup data. The image history of the batch backup data can be confirmed by the simulation function of IV-Navigator.

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector of the monitor.

“Installing/Removing the USB memory” (Page 6-18)

2 Display the USB Memory screen.

“Displaying the USB Memory screen” (Page 6-18)

3 Tap the [Batch Backup] button.

Displays the name of the folder to be created on the USB memory. "Device name_Last 24bit of the MAC address" will be automatically set.

File Name zz Displays the name of the backup file. Tap the [Edit] button and the name can be edited to the arbitrary name. For details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16).

Save zz Selects the backup target. yyProgram Only....Backs up the sensor settings (the Sensor Setup (Settings Navigator) and Sensor Advanced settings of all programs). Prog.+ .......Backs up all the images in the yy Image Hist. image history as well as the sensor settings. When the image history has been saved [During operation], the image being the saving object may be updated and deleted during the batch backup. A deleted image is not saved. Because of this, saving [During setting] is recommended.

File Size zz Displays the size of the backup file (expectancy) and the free space of the USB memory.

5 After the setting is completed, tap the [Go] button.

The Batch Backup screen opens.

4 Perform the Batch Backup settings.

After the batch backup completes, the backup result appears on the monitor.

6 Confirm the backup result and tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen.


6-19


yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup of the data saved in the sensor in case of malfunction of the product. yyThe saving time increases when this is performed in [During operation]. Execution while in the [During setting] status is recommended.

Folder zz


Saving the image history individually



2 Display the zoom-in screen of the image history screen.

“Loading and confirming the saved images” (Page 6-15)

6

3 Tap the [Save to USB Memory] button.


4 Edit the file name as needed and tap the [Go] button.

The image history will be saved to the USB memory and the storage result appears.


The system returns to the zoom-in screen of the image history screen.

6-20



Transferring the settings backed up in the USB memory to the sensor Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved in the USB memory to the sensor.

connector of the monitor.




3 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.

6 The confirmation dialog appears.


The screen to select the setting data opens.

5 Select the batch backup file to be

transferred (*.iva), and tap the [OK] button.

For details of selecting the files in the USB memory, refer to “Selecting the file in the USB memory” (Page 3-17). The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.


6-21


yyOperations cannot be cancelled during transmission of the settings data. yyIt is recommended to back up the data saved in the sensor in a batch beforehand. “Saving the sensor settings or the image history” (Page 6-19) yyThe image data in the image history will not be transferred. yyThe settings file of a different model of the sensor cannot be transferred. yyThe settings data of auto focus type and manual focus type can be transferred mutually. However, when the settings data of a manual focus type are transferred to an auto focus type, the focusing position will be converted to the default value. yyWhen directly connecting the sensor to the PC, the setting file of the sensor with the FTP client function or a field network enabled cannot be transferred. yyWhen the FTP client function or field network function is enabled, the setting data cannot be transferred to the sensor during running.

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB


6 If you would also like to transfer the I/O

polarity (NPN/PNP) and the network settings, touch the “Option” button.

7 Confirm the information of the settings file to be transferred and tap the [Go] button. After the transmission of the settings data is completed, the transmission result will be displayed on the monitor. When the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts.

6

The Option screen opens. Select [Enable] in [Transfer All Settings] and tap the [OK] button.

8 Confirm the transmission result and tap the [OK] button.



When [Transfer All Settings] has been set to [Enable], the system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.

yyWhen the FTP client function is set to [Enable], the image history will be cleared. yyThe number of images which can be saved to the image history when using the FTP client function are as follows. - Color type.................. 70 images - Monochrome type...... 210 images yyThe setting of [Transfer All Settings] is reset to [Disable] after the setting data were transferred or when the setting is canceled. yyWhen the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts.

6-22



Capturing the monitor screen and saving to the USB memory Saves the run screen or settings screen of the monitor into the USB memory as an image file (BMP). The saved image files can be imported into the PC and used as an image for creating reports.

Enabling the screen capturing function

Capturing the screen

1 Enable the screen capture function.

“Enabling the screen capturing function” (Page 6-23)

2 Display the screen to be captured and

tap the title area at the upper part of the screen for about one second.



6


3 Tap the [Screen Capture Settings] button.

4 Select the [Enable] and tap the [OK] button.

The capture will be executed and the completion message appears for a few seconds. yyEach setup screen can be captured by tapping the title area. yyFor the full-screen mode, tap the area where the zooming rate is displayed. yyWhen the screen which displays the taken image is captured, the three types of file (screen capture (bmp), raw image (bmp), image capture file (ivp)) are saved at the same time. yyFor details of the saved folder or file name, refer to “Folder composition and file naming rules” (Page 6-24). yyIn some cases, such as when choice items of a pulldown menu are being displayed or during file processing, screens cannot be captured.



6-23




Folder composition and file naming rules Data type

Batch backup

Storage folder

\(Device name of the sensor)_ (Last 24bit of the MAC address)

File name

YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1

Extension

iva

Reference page

Batch saves all the settings in the sensor. [Program Only] or [Prog.+Image Hist.] can be selected.

6-19

yyScreen capture (with taken images) File name yyIndividual image history storage Extension

\(Device name of the sensor)_ Simultaneously saves the (Last 24bit of the MAC address)\ bmp format file for the IMAGE taken image and the ivp format file which can be YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1 used for master image bmp registration or Tool Auto Tuning. ivp

Storage yyScreen capture folder yyIndividual image history storage File name

yyWhen the sensor is connected \(Device name of the sensor)_ (Last 24bit of the MAC Saves an image that the address)\SCREEN displayed screen has been yyWhen the sensor is not captured as it is including connected the title area and the \IV-M30 buttons. 1 YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *

Extension

bmp

Storage folder

\(Device name of the sensor)_ (Last 24bit of the MAC address)

File name

Paa_Tbb_(Tool name) *2

Extension

ivt

Storage folder

6

Description

Storage Rule


Tool Auto Tuning

Saves images and criteria information of Tool Auto Tuning.

6-20 6-23

6-23

5-28

*1 YYYY: Year; MM: Month; DD: Day; hh: Hour; mm: Minute; ss: Second For individually saving the batch backup and image history, the file name can be changed to arbitrary name and saved. *2 aa: Program number (00 to 31), bb: Tool number (01 to 16), Tool name: The tool name which has been set will be applied as a tool name if the tool name has been set. The tool type will be applied as a tool name if the tool name if the tool name has not been set.

yyThe numbers of files to be saved in each folder must be 100 files or less. Files may not be saved correctly. For the folder with the number of files over 100 files, delete the files and change the folder name. yyThe total numbers of sub folders and files in each folder (iva files or ivp files) that can be displayed on the screen to select a file (Page 3-17) is 128. yyIf characters which cannot be displayed correctly with the current display language (Page 6-51) are included in the folder or file names, the folders or files will be save with those characters replaced by hyphens (-). 6-24


Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor Sensor advanced settings

Setup Adjustment

The section explains the Sensor Advanced screen displayed by tapping [Sensor Advanced] in the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Tilt Correction zz Performs tilt correction of the images displayed on the monitor. “Tilt Correction” (Page 6-38)

Rotate 180° zz Rotates the display of the monitor 180°. “Rotate 180°” (Page 6-40)

White Balance (for color type only) zz

Program Program Switch Method zz Sets the switching method for programs. “Program Switch Method” (Page 6-42)

Environmental

Auto Focus Adj Pos zz

I/O Settings zz Sets the input/output settings, specifies the polarity, and sets the I/O monitor. “I/O Settings” (Page 6-26)

Sets whether or not to share the adjusting position for auto focus to all programs. “Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only)” (Page 6-42)

Device Name/ zz Sets the sensor name and lock. “Device settings” (Page 6-29)

Network Settings zz Sets the network settings for the sensor. “Network Settings” (Page 6-31)

Adv. Network Settings zz Sets the FTP client function and the field network settings for the sensor. “Advanced Network Settings” (Page 6-32)

System Sensor Information zz Displays the information set in the sensor. “Sensor Information” (Page 6-43)

Initialize Sensor zz Initializes the information set in the sensor. “Initializing the sensor” (Page 6-44)

Update Sensor zz Upgrades the sensor software. “Updating the sensor” (Page 6-44)


6-25


Adjusts the white balance for the image displayed on the monitor. “White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-41)


I/O Settings

Input Settings

Sets the input/output settings for the sensor.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

1 Tap the [Settings] button of the input settings.

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Environmental] button and then the [I/O Settings] button.

2 Set the input settings for the sensor.


3 Set the input/output settings for the sensor.

IN1 zz Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for IN1 input line. yyExt. Trigger ↑ Sets the trigger input to the rising edge of the external trigger.

“Input Settings” (Page 6-26) “Output Settings” (Page 6-27) “Polarity” (Page 6-28) “I/O Monitor” (Page 6-28)

yyExt. Trigger ↓ Sets the trigger input to the falling edge of the external trigger.



IN2 to IN6 zz

Sets the roles for input line IN2 to IN6. yyOFF Ignores the input. yyProgram bit0 to bit4 Specifies the number for switching the programs. “Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page 6-8) yyClear Error Sets the error output clearance. yyExt. Master Save Sets the master image registration from the external input.

6-26



Option zz

Common Output Settings zz

The input option screen opens by tapping the [Option] button.

The screen to select the output type opens by tapping the [Common Output Settings] button. “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-6) [Latching] Outputs the result along with the judgment condition of the sensor.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the

6 [One-Shot] Sets the one-shot time and ON-delay time in which output the status output with one-shot.

[Close] button.

The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of the sensor.

Output Settings

1 Tap the [Settings] button of the Output Settings.

yyOne-Shot ON Time Specifies the flash width of the one-shot within 1 to 1000 msec. yyON-Delay Time Specifies the ON-delay time of the one-shot flash within 0 to 5000 msec.

2 Set the Output Settings of the sensor.

For details of settings by the slider or inputting value, refer to “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-14).



OUT1 to OUT4 zz Specifies the output format of the output line with [N.O] or [N.C]. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

6-27


[Write ROM when using “Ext. Master Save”?] Selecting the [Yes] button writes the data to the ROM of the sensor when the master image registration is performed with the external input or field network. “ing the Master Image” (Page 7-8)


Polarity

I/O Monitor

1 Select the [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity.

Whether or not the I/O line for control is correctly wired can be confirmed.

1 Tap the [Go] button in the I/O Monitor.


yyNPN Output circuit.....NPN open collector Input circuit........No-voltage input yyPNP Output circuit.....PNP open collector Input circuit........Voltage input “Cables” (Page 2-12)

2 Set the I/O Monitor settings.





Input zz Displays the input status of external input in real time. Whether or not the ON/OFF output from the PLC is being correctly input can be confirmed.

Output zz Tap the [ON] button to turn ON the each OUT output. Tap the [OFF] button to turn them OFF. Confirm that the PLC or the display lamp is correctly output.



6-28



Device settings

Device Name

Sets the sensor name and lock.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then the [Device Name/] button.

The sensor can be arbitrary named and controlled. When the [Edit] button is tapped, the dialog to enter a device name opens. Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK] button.

3 Set the device settings of the sensor. For details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16).

“Device Name” (Page 6-29) “ Lock” (Page 6-30)




6-29


yyIf the display language (Page 6-51) is changed, the device name might be replaced and displayed as hyphens (-). yyTo use the PROFINET function, use only “a - z”, “0-9”, “-”, and “.”. For the setting details, refer to “IV Series ’s Manual (Field Network)”. yyWhen you changed the device name while the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts.


Lock Sets the to the sensor to prevent the incorrect operation. Correctly use the lock of the sensor and the touch screen lock of the monitor (Page 6-50).


yyTo enable the lock, open the run screen. yyTo disable, input the when the input dialog for the to disable appears. yyDuring the lock, editing the Sensor Setup is locked ([Sensor Setup] button/[Trig] button on the run screen, threshold adjustment, image history view (if unable to ), clearing the image history, Transfer Program Settings). yyIf the lock is temporarily cancelled in the menu ON screen (Page 5-4), the lock is cancelled until the system turns to the menu OFF screen (Page 5-4).

1 Tap the [Settings] button under Security. 2 Select [ON] and tap the [Edit] button.

3 Set a desired in the settings screen.

yyDefault: None (blank) yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16).



5 Enter the set in step 3 and tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Security screen.

6 Tap the [Close] button.

The will be changed and the system returns to the Device Name/ screen.

6-30



3 Sets the network address of the sensor.

Network Settings Sets the network of the sensor.


2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then the [Network Settings] button.

MAC Address zz Displays the MAC address of the sensor. The MAC address cannot be changed.

IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway zz Displays the address for each network. Tapping the [Edit] button opens the screen to edit the address. Set the desired address and tap the [OK] button. For the port number setting, perform it on the editing screen for the IP address.

[Reset] button zz Tapping the [Reset] button resets the IP Address / Subnet Mask / Default Gateway. “Empty” will be displayed after the reset.


yyIf connected directly, the system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen. yyIf connected to the network, terminate the connection to the sensor and reconnect it. If the reconnection is successful, the Sensor Setup Menu screen will be displayed. If the reconnection fails, the Monitor Settings screen will be displayed.


6-31


yyFor details of the monitor's network settings, refer to “Network Settings” (Page 6-48). yyThe settings are not required for direct connection. yyHow to use the network setting yyThe IP address of the sensor connected to the network can be changed. yyThe network settings of the sensor can be initialized. The settings can also be initialized using the IP reset switch (Page A-40) of the sensor. yyTo set the IP address before connecting to the network, it can be set by connecting the monitor and sensor directly. yyWhen you changed the device name while the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts.


Advanced Network Settings Sets the FTP client function and the field network settings for the sensor.


FTP Automatically transfers the image data and status result information saved in the sensor memory to an FTP server.


Data transfer via FTP

LAN

2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then the [Adv. Network Settings] button.

FTP client


The Adv. Network Settings screen opens.

3 Sets the Advanced Network Settings of the sensor.

FTP server

yyTo use the FTP client function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor. During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected. yyIf data are not transferred properly with the FTP client function, refer to “Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-38).

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “FTP”.

“FTP” (Page 6-32) “Field Network” (Page 6-37)



6-32



2 Tap the [ON] button in FTP Client.

3 Sets the FTP setting of the sensor.

“FTP Destination Settings” (Page 6-33) “Transfer Condition Settings” (Page 6-34) “Transfer Destination Folder Settings” (Page 6-35)


The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings screen.

FTP Destination Settings „„

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “FTP Destination”.

IP Address zz Displays the IP address of the FTP server. When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “IP Address” screen opens. Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button. yyThe port number setting can be done on the edit screen of “IP Address”. yyDefault port number : 21

Name zz Input the name for logging in to the FTP server. When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “ Name” screen opens. Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button. yyDefault: None (blank) yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16).

zz Input the for logging in to the FTP server. When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “” screen opens. Set an arbitrary and tap the [OK] button.

The FTP Destination screen opens.


ive Mode zz To use the ive mode, tap the [Enable] button.


6-33


yyWhen the FTP client function is set to [Enable], the image history will be cleared. yyThe number of images which can be saved to the image history when using the FTP client function are as follows. yyColor type................. 70 images yyMonochrome type..... 210 images

2 Set the network address of the FTP server.


3 Tap the [Connection Test] button to

test the connection with the connection destination.

6

The connection test is performed and the result window opens.

Transfer Condition Settings „„

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Transfer Condition”.

The Transfer Condition screen opens.


2 Set the file transfer conditions.

If [Successfully connected.] is displayed, the setting is completed. When the test is executed, the connection with the FTP server, folder creating at the transfer destination, and data file creating are tested. When the connection cannot be done properly, deal with the problem in accordance with the cause of connect failure displayed on the result window. “Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-38)


The system returns to the FTP Destination screen.


The system returns to the main screen of the FTP Settings.

6-34

Transfer Condition zz Selects the transfer condition of image data. yyAll......................Transfers all the images that are judged. yyNG Only............Transfers all the images whose total status results are NG. yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All], adjust the processing time so that all the images can be transferred. yyWhen the transfer could not be done on time, the data are saved in the internal buffer. The internal buffer can save images up to 30 images. yyImage data are transferred in the sequence that they have been saved to the internal buffer. yyWhen the remaining capacity of the internal buffer is insufficient, an FTP error occurs and the image data transfer fails. yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All], confirm that there is sufficient storage area on the FTP server.



File Format zz

Selects the file saving format for image data. yyIVP Transfers the image data as the format which can be opened by IV-Navigator. Operation results can be confirmed in the simulator function by using the transferred image data. Moreover, the image data can be converted to the BMP format by using the IVP-Converter. yyBMP Transfers the image data as the format which can be opened by other applications.

Transfer Destination Folder Settings „„

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Transfer Destination Folder”.

Transfer Judgment Results zz

The Transfer Destination Folder screen opens.

2 Specify the transfer destination folder of FTP server.

The example for displaying the saved results file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

Folder zz

FTP Error zz

To turn ON the error output function for when a file transfer failed, select [Enable]. When this item is set to [Enable], the followings occur if a file transfer fails. yyThe following error messages are displayed in response to the causes of failure. - FTP Connection Error - FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed) - FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer) “Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-38) yyThe error output function turns ON. yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red. yyIf “FTP Transfer Error” has occurred while the sensor is running, the error condition will continue until the error is cleared.



Specifies the transfer destination folder of FTP server. Set an arbitrary folder name. yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to be transferred to the root folder. yyTo specify a subfolder, break it with “/” (onebyte slash). yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new folder will be created. When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “Folder” screen opens. Set an arbitrary folder name and tap the [OK] button. yyDefault: None (blank). Up to 16 characters can be set. yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16). yy“/” (one-byte slash), “.” (one-byte point) and “ ” (one-byte space) cannot be used as the first nor last letter of the folder name. yy“/” (one-byte slash) cannot be used multiple times in a row.


6-35


To transfer judgement results simultaneously with the image data, select [Enable]. Judgement results are transferred as a tab delimited text.


File Name zz

Create Subfolder zz

Sets the file name of the transfer files. When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “File Name” screen opens. Set an arbitrary file name and tap the [OK] button.


yyDefault: None (black). Up to 16 characters can be set. yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-16). yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows. xxxxxx_AAAAA_BB_CC.DDD yyxxxxxx.......The file name which has been set (up to 16 characters) yyAAAAA......A sequence number for each FTP transfer (5 digits which zero suppression is not used). Promptly after startup, “00000” is displayed. yyBB.............The program number (2 digits which zero suppression is not used) yyCC.............The total status result (“OK” or “NG”) yyDDD..........The extension (“ivp” or “bmp”) yyIf there is a file with the same name at the transfer destination, that file will be overwritten. When you transfer image data from multiple IV series, specify different transfer destinations so that the image data are not overwritten accidentally. yyIf the transfer destination folder is read only or is opened, an FTP error will occur and the image data transfer will fail.

Index Upper Limit zz Sets the upper limit of the number of image data which can be transferred to the transfer destination folder.

To create subfolders under the transfer destination folder, select [ON]. yyThe subfolder naming rule is as follows. IVxxxxx (xxxxx is a sequence number created every time the sensor is restarted or the FTP settings are changed.) yyWhen subfolders were created, the folder structure is as follows. Root folder Transfer destination folder Subfolder 0000 0001 0002 When the file index quantity reaches the index upper limit, the folder of the next sequence number is created.

yyThe default of subfolders is “IV00001”. yyThe upper limit is “IV99999”. When the upper limit has been reached, the count continues by returning to “IV00000”. yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized. yyThe upper limit of the count number of folders in the subfolder is “9999”. When the number is over the upper limit, the transfer stops.



When the file index quantity has reached the index upper limit, as follows. yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [ON], the folder of the next sequence number is created. yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [OFF], the file index quantity returns to “0”.

6-36



Field Network Communicates with a PLC via a field network and the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as communication data. For the communication protocol, EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be selected.

Host device such as PLC (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET master unit)

6 EtherNet/IP, PROFINET adapter

yyTo use the field network function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor. During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected. yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts. “IV Series ’s Manual (Field Network)”. yyFor the details of the field network function, refer to

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Field Network”.

2 Select the protocol.

3 To enable the handshake control, select [Enable].

When the protocol is set as [Disable], this setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.


The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings screen.


6-37


Sensor


Tilt Correction If the sensor cannot be installed in the front of the target due to the installation restrictions of the sensor and target and/or to prevent a shine on the target’s surface, the image of the target may be trapezoidally distorted. The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion. Vertical correction

Horizontal correction

Indicator light

6

Top view

Top view


Target

Target

Indicator light

Target

Target

Lateral view

Before tilt correction

6-38

Lateral view

After tilt correction (vertical)

Before tilt correction


After tilt correction (horizontal)



2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button and then the [Tilt Correction] button.

Vertical zz Performs a tilt correction in the vertical direction. Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display of the vertical direction of the taken image.

Before correction

After correction

Before correction

Horizontal zz Performs a tilt correction in the horizontal direction. Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display of the horizontal direction of the taken image.

The information screen opens.

piece of paper printed with square grids.

Before correction

After correction

Before correction

5 Perform the tilt correction.

yyIf the quality of the taken image displayed on the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings] button to adjust the taken image. The following adjustments can be made. “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12) “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-18) “Lighting” (Page 4-18) yyMake sure the target fits within the imaging area after tilt correction. The imaging area after the tilt correction may have become narrower than before the correction by the tilt correction.


OFF zz Tilt correction is not performed.

After performing a tilt correction, a message prompting you to re- the master image appears. Re- the master image after the [OK] button is tapped. “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20) The system returns to the sensor advanced screen.


6-39


3 Tap the [OK] button. 4 Image a target to be a reference such as a

6


3 Image a desired target.

Rotate 180° The image of a target may be rotated 180° and displayed due to the installation restrictions of the sensor and target. The rotate 180° function rotates the image displayed on the monitor 180°.

Indicator light


If the quality of the taken image displayed on the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings] button to adjust the taken image. The following adjustments can be performed. yy “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) yy “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12) yy “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-18) yy “Lighting” (Page 4-18)

4 Tap the [ON] button.

The display of the monitor will be displayed with the image rotated 180°.

Target

Before rotate 180° correction

After rotate 180° correction


2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and then the [Rotate 180°] button.

5 Tap the [OK] button. yyAfter performing a rotate 180° correction, a message prompting you to re- the master image appears. Re- the master image after the [OK] button is tapped. “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20) yyIf a tilt correction (Page 6-38) has also been performed, confirm the tilt correction settings after a rotate 180° correction. The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

6-40



White Balance (for color type only) Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in camera of the sensor.

4 Image a white-colored target and tap the [Go] button.

The white balance is adjusted by default.


2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and then the [White Balance] button.

After the white balance adjustment is completed, the message "White balance complete." appears.


The system returns to the White Balance screen.

The White Balance screen opens.

3 Tap the [Execute] button.

After performing a white balance adjustment, a message prompting you to re- the master image appears. Re- the master image after the [OK] button is tapped. “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20) The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

To initialize the white balance which has been set, tap the [Initialize] button and tap the [OK] button on the confirmation dialog. If the taken image displayed on the monitor is not suitable for adjusting the white balance, tap the [Image Settings] button to adjust the taken image. Also, if the white balance has been set to [Enable], the image will be displayed with the white balance adjustment applied. The following adjustments can be performed. yy “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11) yy “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12) yy “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-18) yy “Lighting” (Page 4-18) - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

6-41



6


Program Switch Method

Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only)

Sets the method for switching the program number. “Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page 6-8)

Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position for the auto focus common to all programs.



2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the

2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the [Auto

3 Set a program switch method.

3 Set an auto focus adjustment position.


[Program Switch Method] button.

Sensor Setup Menu screen. Focus Adj Pos] button.


yyMonitor/PC.........The program number is switched by the monitor or IVNavigator (IV-H1) operation. yyExternal IN........The program number is switched by the external input. To use the [External IN], any of the program bit0 to bit4 must be assigned to any of the IN2 to IN6 in the input settings. “Input Settings” (Page 6-26)


6-42

Common zz Sets the focus adjustment position common to all programs. Select this when the focus position of the target ed in each program is common. The program can be quickly switched because re-adjustment of the focusing position will not be performed when the program number is switched.

Individual zz Sets the focus adjustment position in each program. Select this when the focus position is different for each target ed in each program. Re-adjusts the focusing position when the program number is switched. Switching programs takes longer in this option due to the time needed to adjust the focusing position.



The duration for the operation count of the focusing function (program switch count) is 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to be changed for each program, set the “Auto Focus Adj Pos” to “Common” to extend its duration.

Sensor Information Displays the information set in the sensor. The model, version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and device name can be confirmed.


4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] 2 Tap the [System] button and then the button. [Sensor Information] button.

When the auto focus adjustment position is set to [Common], a message recommending reregistration of the master image appears. Re- the master image after the [OK] button is tapped. “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20) The information set in the sensor will be displayed.

The monitor information (Page 6-53) can be confirmed by tapping the [Monitor Information] button at the lower left of the screen.

3 After the information is confirmed, tap the [OK] button.



6-43



6


Initializing the sensor Initializes the information set in the sensor and sets to the factory default. For details of procedures, refer to “Initializing the sensor” (Page 3-12). yyThe following settings will not be initialized. yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28) yyNetwork Settings (Page 6-31) yyUse the "Initialize monitor" function to initialize the information set in the monitor. “Initializing the monitor” (Page 3-13)


Updating the sensor Updates the operation software of the sensor. For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage. URL : http://www.keyence.com/

6-44


Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information Monitor Settings

Monitor Environment

The section explains the monitor settings displayed by tapping the [Monitor Settings] button with the state that the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.

Language zz Selects the language to be displayed on the monitor. “Language” (Page 6-51)

Time zz Confirms or changes the time set in the monitor. “Time” (Page 6-51)

Backlight zz Sets the backlight of the monitor. “Backlight” (Page 6-52)

6

Adjusts the position to be touched of the monitor. “Touch Calibration” (Page 6-52)

System Monitor Information zz Displays the information set in the monitor. “Monitor Information” (Page 6-53)

Sensor Connect Performs the settings for connecting with the sensor. “Sensor Connect” (Page 6-46)

Initialize Monitor zz Initializes the information set in the monitor. “Initialize Monitor” (Page 6-53)

Update Monitor zz Updates the software version of the monitor. “Displaying the Sensor Image History screen” (Page 6-14)

Monitor Device Settings Network Settings zz Performs the network settings of the monitor. “Network Settings” (Page 6-48)

Display Settings zz Performs the settings for the screens and buttons to be displayed on the monitor. “Display Settings” (Page 6-49)

Touch Screen Lock zz Sets to prevent the incorrect operation of the monitor. “Touch Screen Lock” (Page 6-50) - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

6-45


Touch Calibration zz


Sensor Connect Performs the settings for connecting with the sensor. The setting method differs whether the monitor and sensor are directly connected or connected via network.

When directly connecting with the sensor

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.

6

2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.

yyIf the connection cannot be established, refer to “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable” (Page A-28). yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is automatically set. yyIf the PC is directly connected with the sensor when the PROFINET function is being used, the PROFINET function will stop. To use the PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.

When connecting with the sensor via a network




2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.

yyIf the monitor and sensor are connected directly, the [Direct Connection] will be displayed. yyPerform the procedure from step 3 only if an IP address is displayed (network connected).

3 Tap the [Direct Connection] button and tap the [OK] button.

When the monitor and the sensor are connected via network, the [Network Connection] will be displayed and the IP address of the connected sensor will be displayed.

3 Tap the [Network Connection] button and tap the [OK] button.



The monitor restarts. After the restart, the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

6-46

The confirmation dialog appears. yyIf the FTP client function is to be set to [ON], select [Network Connection]. yyIf the field network is to be set to [EtherNet/IP] or [PROFINET], select [Network Connection].




The monitor restarts. After the restart, the sensor connection setup screen opens.

Searching for and connecting to sensors on zz the network

Tap the [Search Sensor] button.

yyBOOTP is used for asg the IP address to the sensor. “Settings after initialization” (Page A-40) yyThe search time is about 10 seconds. yySearching range and retrievable number of units are as follows. yySensor with no IP address (default) : A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor reaches (Page A-40). yySensor with IP address : A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on the local network to which the monitor is connected.


The searched result will be displayed. Select the sensor to be connected using the [<] or the [>] button and tap the [Connect] button.

After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. When a sensor without a set IP address is selected and the [Connect] button is tapped, the confirmation dialog appears. The information dialog appears when the [OK] button is tapped. The screen to set the sensor network settings opens when the [OK] button is tapped. Tap the [Edit] button, set the IP address, the subnet mask, and the default gateway, and then tap the [Connect] button.


6

6-47


Specifying the IP address of and zz connecting to the sensor

Network Settings Performs the settings of the network address of the monitor.

Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.



2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button, and then the [Network Settings] button.


The screen to input the IP address of the sensor to be connected opens. Input the IP address of the sensor to be connected and tap the [Connect] button.

3 Set the network address for the monitor.

yyWhen the [Ping Test] is tapped after the IP address is input, you can confirm whether or not a sensor with the specified IP address exists on the network. yyTo set a port number, set it using the [PORT] button. After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. If the connection cannot be established, refer to “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page A-29).

MAC Address zz Displays the MAC address for the monitor. The MAC address cannot be changed.

IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway zz Tapping the [Edit] button displays the screen to edit the address. Set the arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.


The message "Monitor will be restarted." appears.


The monitor restarts. After the restart, the run screen opens.

6-48



Display Settings Sets the display method of the screens or messages to be displayed on the monitor.



2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button, and then the [Display Settings] button.


3 Set the individual display item.

Manual Trigger zz

Sets to enable/disable the [Trig] button in the run screen when the Trigger Options are set to [External]. “Names and Functions of the Operation Screen” (Page 5-4) The [Trig] button displayed in the settings screen cannot be set to hidden.

Update Image in RUN Mode zz

Sets the display to ON/OFF for the taken image to be displayed on the monitor. Usually the setting is set to ON.

Tool Auto Tuning Guide zz

Sets the Tool Auto Tuning Guide to show/hide. The display automatically turns OFF by tapping the [Hide Next] button in the Tool Auto Tuning Guide.


The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

6-49


6 Enter the set in step 4 and tap

Touch Screen Lock Sets the on the monitor to prevent misoperation of the touch . yyTo enable the touch screen lock, turn the screen to the menu OFF screen on the run screen (Page 5-4). yyTo disable it, tap the [Menu] button and input the . yyDuring the touch screen lock, operations other than the tool selection and image capture are locked.

6




2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button

and then the [Touch Screen Lock] button.

the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Touch Screen Lock screen.


The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.

For efficiently using the touch screen lock and lock (Page 6-30), yyThe touch screen lock function locks the touch screen operation of the monitor to prevent misoperations of the monitor and the sensor connected to the monitor. yyThe lock function locks the sensor settings. It does not lock the operations and settings of the monitor. yyTo lock editing the sensor settings with multiple monitors or the IV-Navigator (IV-H1), use the lock function. It cannot protect from the misoperations by the monitor or IV-Navigator (IV-H1) that the touch screen lock is not applied. “ Lock” (Page 6-30)

3 Select [Enable] and tap the [Edit] button.

4 Set the arbitrary in the settings screen.




6-50



Language

Time

Selects the language to be displayed on the monitor.



2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and then the [Language] button.

Sets the date and time of the monitor. yyThis setting is adjusted by default. yyThe date and time information are used for saving files into the USB memory.



2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and then the [Time] button.


3 Select the button of the language to be

displayed on the monitor and tap the [OK] button.

3 Set the date and time of the monitor.

The information screen opens.


The monitor restarts. After the restart, the display language will be switched to the selected language and the run screen opens.

Regarding the display of the characters in device names (Page 6-29) and program names (Page 6-12) yyCharacters which cannot be display with the language after change are replaced and displayed as hyphens (-). yyIf the device or program name has not been changed after you changed a language, those name can be displayed as they were in the previous language once you change back a language into the previous one. yyIf the device or program name has been changed after the language change, it will remain replaced by hyphens (-) and the former information will be erased when the language is changed back.

yyMove the input cursor to the item to set by the [←] or [→] button and enter the numbers. yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the selected item.




6

6-51


Backlight

Touch Calibration

Sets the backlight of the monitor.

Adjusts the position to be touched of the touch .

The monitor recovers from dim mode when the touch is operated or when an error occurs



2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and

6

then the [Backlight] button.


3 Set the backlight of the monitor.

This setting is adjusted by default.



2 Tap the [Monitor Enviroment] button and tap the [Touch Calibration] button.



The screen switches to the screen to adjust the position to be tapped.

4 Follow the message displayed on the

monitor and tap the center of the cross mark ( ) in order.

Backlight Brightness zz

Adjusts the brightness of the backlight. The brightness can be adjusted between level 1 to 7 (default : 5).

Auto Off zz

Selects the [Enable]/[Disable] for the Auto Off function.

Auto Off Time Delay zz

This is available when the [Enable] is selected for the Auto Off function. Sets the time delay of the monitor to be dimmed. Also, after 30 minutes since the monitor being dimmed, the monitor turns off. Options: 30 sec/1 min/5 min/10 min/30 min

After the adjustment for the positions to be tapped is completed, the message "Touch calibration completed. Touch the screen to exit." appears.

5 Tap the monitor.



The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen. 6-52



Monitor Information

Initialize Monitor

Displays the information set in the monitor. Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC address, and IP address.



2 Tap the [System] button and then the [Monitor Information] button.

Initializes the information set in the monitor and set to the factory default. For details of procedures, refer to “Initializing the monitor” (Page 3-13). yyThe following settings will not be initialized. yy“Language” (Page 6-51) yy“Time” (Page 6-51) yyUse the "Initialize Sensor" function to initialize the information set in the sensor. “Initializing the sensor” (Page 3-12)

6

The information set in the monitor will be displayed.

Updates the operation software of the monitor. For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage. URL : http://www.keyence.com/

The sensor information (Page 6-43) can be confirmed by tapping the [Sensor Information] button at the lower left of the screen.

3 After the information is confirmed, tap the [OK] button.



6-53


Update Monitor


MEMO

6 Useful Features/Various Functions 6-54


7

Controlling with Input/Output Line

This chapter explains how the input / output terminal controls each operation.


7-1

7 Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers...............................................................7-2 Importing the Status Output..............................7-4 Changing Over....................................................7-7 ing the Master Image...........................7-8 Clearing Errors.................................................7-10 Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on...................................7-11 Input Response Time.......................................7-12

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers For details of the trigger, refer to

“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8).

External trigger When the [Trigger Options] is set to [External], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of inputting the external trigger input. Trigger 1

Trigger 2

Min 100 μs

External trigger input

ON OFF

Trigger 3

Trigger 4

Min 1.2 ms

(5)

(1) Processing time

BUSY output

ON OFF

Judgment process (internal)


Total status output Status output of each tool Position adjustment output Output of each logic Trigger error output

(2) Max 2 ms

(3) Trigger delay

ON OFF

Min 0.2 ms

Previous result

Result from Trigger 1

(4)



Max 2 ms

ON OFF

(1) Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 μs for ON, and 1.2 ms for OFF. (2) BUSY output function turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings. (3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-8) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is performed. (4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output. (5) If the external trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON]. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yyThe ON status of each input indicates 0 V line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 6-28) is NPN, and indicates that voltage is applied within the 0 V line when the Polarity is PNP. yyThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input. “Input Settings” (Page 6-26) yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-6).

7-2


Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

Internal trigger When the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of set trigger interval. Internal trigger

Trigger 1

(1)

Trigger 2

Trigger interval

Trigger interval

Processing time

BUSY output

ON OFF

Trigger error output

Trigger 4

Trigger interval

Trigger 5

Trigger interval

(5)

(2) (3)

Judgment process (internal) Total status output Status output of each tool Position adjustment output Output of each logic

Trigger 3

Min 0.2 ms

ON OFF

Previous result




(4)

7

ON OFF

(2) BUSY output function turns ON at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs depending on the settings. (3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings. (4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output. (5) If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON]. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-6). Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.

Operating in the shortest cycle To input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger input to 1 ms. Also, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment of Settings Navigator (Page 4-60) to [OFF] and ignore the trigger error.


7-3


(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set.

Importing the Status Output

Importing the Status Output Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details on asg to output line, refer to “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60).

Importing the total status / total status NG output Total status results of multiple detection tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be checked. External trigger/Internal trigger

Trigger 1 Processing time

White line: OUT 2 Assign the BUSY output Black line: OUT 1 Assign the total status/ total status NG output

7

ON OFF Min 0.2 ms

ON OFF

Previous total status result

Total status result of Trigger 1


yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-6). output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to yyThe total status output turns ON when the total status results were OK. The total status NG output turns ON when the total status results were NG. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. yy[All Tools OK] When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position adjustment result were OK, the total status result is OK. yy[Any Tool OK] When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK, the total status result is OK. yy[Logic 1] to [Logic 4] When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK. yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF when the program number is switched or external master image is ed. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.

7-4



Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic The individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked. Trigger input

Trigger 1 Processing time

Black line: OUT 1 Assign the BUSY output

ON OFF Min 0.2 ms

ON

White line: OUT 2 Assign "Tool 1"

OFF

Gray line: OUT 3 Assign "Tool 2"

OFF

Orange line: OUT 4 Assign "Logic 1"

OFF

ON ON

Previous result

Status result of Tool 1

Previous result

Status result of Tool 2

Previous result

Status result of Logic 1


7-5


yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-6). yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually. yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool/logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result was NG or --. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF when the program number is switched or external master image is ed.


Changing the timing of the status output The timing of status output can be selected from the [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot] which outputs for a certain time. For details on settings, refer to “Output Settings” (Page 6-27). External trigger/Internal trigger BUSY output

Trigger 1

Trigger 2

ON OFF Min 0.2 ms

Status output (Latching output) Status output (One-Shot output)

ON OFF ON

Status result of Trigger 1

Previous status result

Status result of Trigger 1

OFF Delay time

7

Status result of Trigger 2 Status result of Trigger 2

One-Shot ON Time

Delay time

One-Shot ON Time

yyIn case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment. yyIn case of [One-Shot], outputs in a set amount of time after the set delay time is ed. yyWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is ed, the status output turns OFF before each process is completed.


Cancelling One-Shot output To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met. Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is cancelled and is not output. Trigger 1

External trigger/Internal trigger BUSY output

(1) ON OFF ON

Internal process of Trigger 1

OFF

Internal process of Trigger 2

OFF

Judgment process

Trigger 2

Trigger input interval

(2) Delay time

ON

One-Shot ON Time

(3)

Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)

Delay time

ON OFF

Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)

One-Shot ON Time

Status result of Trigger 1 Delay time

One-Shot ON Time

(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time. (2) To perform the One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One-Shot output is completed, so that outputting can be performed normally. (3) To perform One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 2, the One-Shot output of Trigger 1 is output. Therefore, the output status of Trigger 2 will be cancelled and it will not be output. yyIf the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to use it. The system might be affected by a fluctuating BUSY time. BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time 7-6


Changing Over

Changing Over Program functions can easily change over by reading out the judgment condition previously saved with the input line. For details of program functions, refer to “Changeover for a Target ( Program Functions)” (Page 6-8). External trigger/Internal trigger Program bit0 to bit4 Input

Trigger 1

ON OFF

(1)

Min 10 ms

(5)

PROG00

PROG01

Switching time

(4)

ON OFF ON OFF

PROG00

PROG01

PROG02

Min 0 ms Previous result


7

(3)

ON OFF

(1) Keeps the Program bit0 to bit4 input by switching to the state of the program number to be switched. Minimum input time is 10 ms. “When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method” (Page 6-11) (2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time differs depending on the settings. (3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the switching program is completed. (4) If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the system cancels the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not output). The switching process is delayed by the canceling process. Delay is time differs depending on the settings. (5) If the trigger occurs while switching the programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under the Settings Navigator to [ON]. In the case of a manual trigger, the trigger is processed after the switching program is completed. “Input Response Time” (Page 7-12). yyFor details on T1 and T2, refer to yyUse this function during an operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup. yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. yyIf the switched program is set to [Internal], the first timing for inputting the trigger after switching the program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger interval may occur. yyDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching programs and external master registration process will vary. yyThe response of an image displayed on the monitor might be delayed until after switching programs (BUSY output OFF).


7-7


Trigger error output

PROG02

Switching time (T1)

T2

Total status output Status output of each tool Position adjustment output Output of each logic

Trigger 3

(2)

BUSY output

Program number

Trigger 2

ing the Master Image

ing the Master Image The external master registration function can the master image with using the input line. For details on master image registration, refer to “2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20). External trigger/Internal trigger

(1) Trigger 1

(7) Trigger 2 Min 2 ms

(Min 2 ms)

External master registration input

ON

(2)

OFF

Master image registration time (T3)

BUSY output Judgment process (internal) Master image (internal)


Total status output Status output of each tool Position adjustment output Output of each logic Error output

ON

(3)

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

T4 Image of Trigger 1

(5) Previous master image

Image of Trigger 1

(4) Previous result



ON

(6) In case of failure

OFF

(1) Takes an image to be ed as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger. (2) If the BUSY output turns OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms. (3) The BUSY output turns ON and the master registration starts. The master registration time differs depends on the settings. (4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the master image registration is completed. (5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be ed as a master image. (6) If the external image registration is failed, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master image registration is succeeded with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF when the external master image registration is succeeded or by the clear error input. (7) After the master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new master image. Trigger 2 judges the target with using an image of Trigger 1 as a master image.

7-8


ing the Master Image

“Input Response Time” (Page 7-12). yyFor details of T3 and T4, refer to yyUse this function during an operation. The external master image registration cannot be performed during setup. yyIf the trigger occurs while ing the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. The trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON]. y y If the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the system cancels the judgment process (taken image will not be ed). After the process is canceled, the image taken before cancellation is ed as a master image. The master image registration process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delaying time differs depending on the settings. yyDo not change over the programs at the same time as external master registration input is being performed. The sequence of the external master registration and switching programs process will vary.

ROM writing settings

Master image is ed externally when power is turned OFF

Number of times that external master image registration can perform (duration)

Yes

The master image is not deleted. The image can be used as a master image after starting up the device next time.

100,000 times

No

The master image is deleted. External master image registration needs to be performed after starting up the device.

No limit

yyIf the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is in the settings mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is in the settings mode before the power is turned OFF. yyIf the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3). Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost.


7-9


yyIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when using “Ext. Master Save”?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the internal sensor. For details of settings, refer to “Input Settings” (Page 6-26).

Clearing Errors

Clearing Errors If an error targeted for clearing has occurred, outputting an error can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Error occurred (Min 2 ms)

Clear Error input

ON

Min 2 ms

(2)

OFF

T5

Error output

7

ON

(1)

OFF


(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON. Error types which can be output are as follows. yySystem error yyStartup memory readout error yyExternal master registration error yyTrigger error To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON]. yyFTP error To output the FTP error, set the FTP error within the FTP settings (Page 6-32) to [Enable]. (2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms. Errors which can be cleared are as follows. yyExternal master registration error yyTrigger error yyFTP error The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared. yyFor details on T5, refer to

7-10

“Input Response Time” (Page 7-12).


Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on

Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when starting operation. Initializing 2 seconds or longer

Power (DC24V)

BUSY 20 ms or longer

RUN

OFF

Determine the I/O settings

(2)

(3)

ON

Trigger

(4)

OFF (5)

ON

7

OFF (6)

ON OFF

Total status output Status output of each tool ON Position adjustment output OFF Output of each logic

Min 0 ms

Min 0.2 ms

Min 0.2 ms

(1) After the power is turned ON, the I/O Settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined. “Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-11) “Polarity” (Page 6-28) “Output Settings” (Page 6-27) (2) The program number will be determined. If the program switching condition (Page 6-42) is set to [External IN], the program number is determined according to the inputting condition of the input line. (3) BUSY output function turns ON. yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON. yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur. (4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate. yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF. yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON. By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked. (5) If the startup error is occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status. (6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yyThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output assignment for program numbers (Page 4-60) determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs are not being assigned, it will not be output. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

7-11


RUN output

System error

(1)

Trigger

Error output

RUN

ON

Program number

BUSY output

Setting

Input Response Time

Input Response Time

The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response times may differ depending on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming the BUSY output for securing from the affect of different response times.

Response time for the switch program input T1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + E + 50 [ms] (typ.) T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)

Response time for the external master registration input T3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + E + 50 [ms] (typ.) T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)

7

Response time for the error clear input


T5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)

Description for symbols Symbols

Description

Time

Judgment process cancelling time *

400 (800) [ms] (typ.) Added when it is input during the judgment process.

B

Tool registration time *

Total of the "Registration time x Number of set tools" for following each tool Position adjustment : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.) Outline : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.) Color area : 100 [ms] (typ.) Area : 100 [ms] (typ.)

C

Auto focus position adjustment time

860 [ms] (typ.) Added only when auto focus-type sensor is used and the [Auto Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-42) is set to [Individual].

D

Nonvolatile memory saving time

3,500 [ms] (typ.) Added only when the [Write ROM when using “Ext. Master Save”?] (Page 6-27) is set to [Yes].

E

Trigger delay time

Trigger delay setting time (0 to 1,000) [ms] Added only when the [External] (Page 4-10) is selected for trigger type.

A

* These are the times in case the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later. The times for the version R1.00 are those inside ().

7-12


8

Specifications

This chapter explains the specifications and dimensions of the sensor and monitor.

Specifications.....................................................8-2 Dimensions.........................................................8-6

8 Specifications


8-1

Specifications

Specifications Sensor Model

IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA Standard range

Installed distance

50 to 500mm

Image sensor

1/3 inch color CMOS

Exposure time

8

Amplifier type Light

Specifications

Tool

Lighting method Type Number*2

Switch settings (programs) Image history*3

Manual

1/10 to 1/50,000

Auto*1

1/10 to 1/25,000

White LED

Manual

Auto*1

1/20 to 1/25,000

Red LED

Manual

Auto*1

1/10 to 1/25,000 Infrared LED

Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable Outline search, Color area*7, Area*8, Position adjustment Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool 32 programs

Condition

NG only/All is selectable

Indicators

300 images*5

OFF/Statistics/Histograms is switchable Statistics : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors, judge results list by tools Histograms : Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs HDR, HighGain, Color filters*7, Digital zoom*8, Brightness correction, Tilt correction, White balance*7, Mask outline, Mask area, Test run, ToolAutoTune, Input monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator*9 PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower, ON current 2mA (short circuit) For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4V, ON voltage 15V or higher, OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)

Input

Inputs Function

8-2

Auto*1

100 images*4

Other functions

300 to 2000mm

752 (H) x 480 (V) Manual

Numbers

Analysis information*6

50 to 150mm

1/3 inch monochrome CMOS

Pixel Focus adjustment

Long range

Installed distance Installed distance 50mm : 300mm : 12 (H) x 9 (V) mm 45 (H) x 33 (V) mm to to Installed distance Installed distance 150mm : 2000mm : 36 (H) x 27 (V) mm 300 (H) x 225 (V) mm

Installed distance 50 mm : 25 (H) x 18 (V) mm to Installed distance 500mm : 210 (H) x 157 (V) mm

View

Short range

6 inputs (IN1 to IN6) IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by asg the optional functions Assignable functions : Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

Specifications

Model

IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Output

Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA, remaining voltage 1.5V or lower For open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA, remaining voltage 2V or lower

Ethernet*10

Outputs

4 outputs (OUT1 to OUT4)

Function

Enable by asg the optional functions Assignable functions : Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result, Judge result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool

Standard

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

Connector M12 4pin connector

Network function Rating

Power voltage

FTP client, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET DC 24V ± 10% (including ripple)

Consumption 0.6A or less current

8

Environmental resistance

Relative humidity

35 to 85%RH (No condensation)

Vibration

10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes

Specifications

Ambient 0 to +50°C (No freezing) temperature

Shock 500m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times resistance Enclosure IP67 rating*11

Material

Main unit case : Aluminum die-casting, Packing : NBR, Front Cover : Acrylic, Mounting adapter : POM

Weight

Approx. 270 g

*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the operation. The focusing position can be ed by programs. *2 Tools can be installed by programs. *3 Saves to the memory in the sensor. The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the software for IV (IV-H1). *4 70 images when using the FTP client function *5 210 images when using the FTP client function *6 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the IV software (IV-H1). *7 Color type only. *8 Monochrome type only. *9 This function can be used with the software for IV (IV-H1). *10 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software (IV-H1). *11 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437) is mounted. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

8-3

Specifications

Intelligent Monitor Model

IV-M30

Display Backlight Touch

3.5" TFT color LCD 320 x 240 dot (QVGA)

Method

White LED

Duration

Approx. 50,000 hours (25 ˚C)

Method

Analog resistive

Actuating force

0.8N or lower

Indicators Ethernet*1

PWR, SENSOR

Standard

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

Connector

M12 4pin connector Japanese / English / Deutsch / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean

Languages

USB memory*2

Expanded memory

8

Rating

Specifications

Environmental resistance

*1 *2 *3

8-4

Power voltage

DC 24V ± 10% (including ripple)

Consumption current

0.2A or lower

Ambient temperature

0 to +50°C (No freezing)

Relative humidity*3

35 to 80%RH (No condensation)

Vibration

10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes

Drop impact resistance

1.3m over the concrete (2 times each in the arbitrary direction)

Enclosure rating

IP40

Material

Polycarbonate

Weight

Approx. 180g

This is dedicated for connection with IV Series sensor. Use the KEYENCE recommended product. If the ambient temperature is over 40˚C, use it in the absolute humidity of 40˚C 80% RH or lower.


Specifications

MEMO

8 Specifications


8-5

Dimensions

Dimensions Sensor yyIV-500C yyIV-500CA



yyIV-2000M yyIV-2000MA (102)

R

R5

0

52

50 Focusing position adjustment screw (MF type only)

8

50

0.4

41 10.5

50

10.5

32.4

57.4

Specifications

10.5

81.5

Mounting adapter

56 58

20

1/4-20UNC (Depth 6mm)

WD reference surface

8-6

45.5

25

4-M4

(Depth 6mm)


6

3-M3 (Depth 6mm) 20.5

(108)

Dimensions

34.6

φ134

yyWith dome attachment Installed distance : 0 to 50 mm from the front of the dome attachment Compatible sensor : Standard range type/Short range type

62 Distance from WD reference surface

yyWith polarizing filter attachment 32

Specifications

φ56

8

5 Distance from WD reference surface

Optional parts for the sensor Dome attachment yyIV-D10

φ134

90.4


8-7

Dimensions

Polarizing filter attachment

Power I/O cable

yyOP-87436

yyOP-87440 (2m)

yyOP-87437 32

yyOP-87441 (5m)

yyOP-87442 (10m)

2000 5000 10000

φ6.7

φ15

φ56

45

Mounting adapter yyOP-87460

8 Specifications

4-φ3.2 φ6.8 Counterbore depth 3mm

1/4-20UNC (Depth 6mm)

20

56

57

4-M4 (Depth 6mm) 17

25

Front cover yyOP-87461 0.4

φ50

27.1

8-8


120

5 150 5 180

5

Dimensions

Bracket yyOP-87685 112.5

56

19.6

31.6

93

48.4

50

0.4

99

58

Specifications


8

82.5

41

(99)

8-9

Dimensions

Intelligent Monitor yyIV-M30

102.3 70.56 (Display area)

(2.2) (13)

1.4

52.12 (Display area)

84

8

(52)

USB port 26.4 (Excluding the convexed surface)

R20

(109)

Specifications

R50

yyUsing the wall mounting adapter 6 8 2.74 98.7

40

20.2 2-φ3.5 30.3

Mounting hole dimension 40

8-10


2-M3

Dimensions

yyUsing the mounting adapter 119 110

4 22.8

110

92 +1 0

110.5

109 100 91.5

4-φ3.5

100 111 +1 0

thickness 1 to 4mm

(40)

cutting dimensions

4-M3 Screw depth 4.2

(97)

8

yyUsing the DIN mounting adapter

Specifications

107

35.9

57.1

33.8


8-11

Dimensions

Optional parts for the monitor Monitor power cable yyOP-87444 (5m)

yyOP-87445 (10m)

yyOP-87464 4.5

φ9.5

φ3.7

yyOP-87443 (2m)

Wall mounting adapter

26.7

96.9

2000 5000 10000

Protection sheet

48

yyOP-87463

8.5

mounting adapter

73.9 69.9

yyOP-87465

8 Specifications

50.4 109

5

t = 0.16

Stylus

119

yyOP-87462 φ7.6

94.7

φ5.6

DIN mounting adapter yyOP-87466

81.3

9.9 107

8-12

30.7


18.5

Dimensions

Connection Cable Monitor cable

Ethernet cable yyOP-87451 (5m) yyOP-87453 (20m)

yyOP-87458 (5m)

yyOP-87459 (10m)

2000 5000 10000 20000

14.6

φ14.8

φ6.4

φ14.8

47.3

yyOP-87457 (2m)

φ6.4

yyOP-87450 (2m) yyOP-87452 (10m)

47.3

2000 5000 10000

59

47.3

8 Specifications


8-13

Dimensions

MEMO

8 Specifications 8-14


Appendices

Status Table.......................................................A-2 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool................................. A-5 Settings List.......................................................A-6 Troubleshooting..............................................A-19 Error Messages...............................................A-22 Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor............................ A-28 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch).............................................A-40 Maintenance.....................................................A-41 Index.................................................................A-42


A-1

A

Status Table

Status Table Status table Monitor screen type

Status

Sensor operation indicator light PWR/ERR

Waiting for a trigger Running *2

Judgment processing

RUN

Switching programs

Lighting (green)

TEST

Trigger Options, Master Registration, etc. Focus adjustment (MF) Setting

Automatically adjusting the brightness Automatically adjusting the focus (AF)

LIVE

Trigger error Error

*5 OFF

Blink (green)

OFF

*5

OFF

*14

OFF

-

Blink (green)

OFF

*15 OFF

Others

A

OFF

*13

Setup Adjustment I/O Monitor

*3

TRIG

*9

ing the external master image Limit Adjustment

OUT

Running

RUN

Setting

LIVE

Blink (red)

-

Lighting (red)

Same as normal

External master registration error System error Startup memory readout error

OFF

OFF

¡/Í indicates enable/disable of the input. ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C). yyFor N.O. ON : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output. OFF : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output. yyFor N.C. ON : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output. OFF : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output. *1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG. When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON. When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. “Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-65) When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG. *2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of the [Monitor Settings/Sensor Image History/USB Memory] screen in the run screen. *3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process. OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red) *4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process. *5 Lights (one-shot) by linking to the trigger issuance (external/internal). When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay. A-2


Status Table

Input External trigger ¡ *6

Output

External Switch master image programs registration ¡

¡

*7

*8

*10

*11

*11

*10

Clear Error

Í

Total Status / Total status NG / Each tool / Each logic / Pos.Adj. *1

OFF Í

¡ Í

BUSY

Í

Error

ON

OFF

*4

ON

*12

Same as while running

OFF

OFF OFF

*13

Í

RUN

OFF *16

←

←

←

←

←

←

Í

Í

Í

Í

OFF

OFF

OFF

Same as normal

Í

Í

Same as normal

¡

Í

Í

OFF

OFF

*17

*17

ON OFF

*17

*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs. *7 Stops the judgment process and switches over. *8 Stops the judgment process and s the previously taken image as a master image. *9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result will be displayed. *10 After the current process is completed, generates the new input. *11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate. *12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF. *13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image will be updated. The Busy output operates. *14 The flashing cycle of the orange light changes by linking to the focus indicator. The STATUS indicator light operates in the same way. *15 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated. *16 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned functions will not operate. *17 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the polarity (NPN/PNP) settings. Additionally, refer to

“Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 7-1).


A-3

A

Status Table

Displaying and outputting the status result Status

A

Display

Total Status NG

Total Status *2

Judgment of each tool Output

Display

Output

Output

---

OFF

--

OFF

OFF

OK

0 to 100

ON

Judge is NG

NG

0 to 100

OFF

Unable to judge *6

--

---

OFF

Judgment

Matching rate *1

Waiting for a trigger (Not judged) *3

--

Judge is OK

*4

*5

*6

OFF

ON

*1 When the setting scale is changed by the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected. The cut-off process (Page A-5) may be performed for the outline tool and the position adjustment tool. *2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. “Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-65) *3 In this status, there is no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has changed, or after a shift from the setting mode to the run mode. *4 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON. *5 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON. *6 The judgment of position adjustment tool cannot be determined if the judgment of each tool cannot be determined at the time of using the position adjustment tool. For details, refer to “Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment” (Page A-4).

Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment Position Window adjustment protrusion *1 result No Succeeded Yes

Failed

Display/output

Judgment of each tool

Total Total Status Color Area/ Status *2 NG Area

Pos. Adj.

Outline

View judgment

OK

OK/NG

OK/NG

Status output

ON

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

View matching rate

0 to 100

0 to 100

View judgment

OK

OK/NG

-- *6

Status output

ON

ON/OFF

OFF

0 to 100

*7

0 to 100

---

*3

*4

*5

*3

*4

*6

View matching rate

0 to 100

View judgment

NG

--

--

NG

Status output

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

View matching rate

0 to 100

---

---

ON

*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area (Page 4-17) at the time of position adjustment succeeded. *2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. “Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-65) *3 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON. *4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON. *5 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected when the setting scale has been changed. *6 For details of the target’s outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to “Matching rate at the time of protrusion” (Page A-5) *7 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area. A-4


Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool Matching rate at the time of protrusion When the search region is “Entire” zz When the target outline protrudes from the imaging area, the protruding outline is excluded from the target for calculating the matching rate. The matching rate decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount. Tool window Protruding outline (excluded from the target for calculating the matching rate)

Cut-off process of the matching rate The cut-off process means the process where the outline detection process is ended when no outline exceeding a certain matching rate (cut-off value) below the threshold value is found. A matching rate which has been cut off becomes 0. Because the cut-off value is linked to the threshold, the cut-off value is also changed when the threshold is changed. (Cut-off value) Threshold Matching rate

Outline to be targeted for calculating the matching rate

Cut-off processing range (Range where the matching rate becomes 0)

Current matching rate

Imaging area

When the search region is “Partial” zz

A

The sensor searches the outline of the target that is in the search region. The matching rate of the target being out of search region will be “0”. If the target is being protruded from the imaging area, the matching rate will decrease depends on how much the target is protruded from the imaging area.

The above behavior is the case that the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later. For the version R1.00, the matching rate decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.

When the tool window after position adjustment protrudes from the imaging area, the judgment display of the Color Area/Area tool becomes -(Unable to judge) and the status output turns OFF.


A-5

Settings List

Settings List RUN screen (menu display OFF) Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference page

(Tool name)

A tool to be selected on the Number of tools set in the monitor can be switched. program

5-4

Menu

Displays the menu.

-

5-4

Setting range

Reference page

Number of tools set in the program

5-4

RUN screen (menu display ON) Menu

Description

(Tool name)

A tool to be selected on the monitor can be switched.

OFF

Hides menus.

-

5-4

Monitor Settings

The Monitor Settings screen opens.

-

6-45


Displays the Sensor Image History screen.

-

6-14


-

6-14

Batch Backup

Backs up the image history in the sensor.

-

6-19

View

Displays the selected image in full-screen in the monitor.

-

5-6

Save to USB Memory

Saves the displayed image to the USB memory.

-

6-20

Auto Tuning

Performs the Tool Auto Tuning based on the displayed image.

View

A

5-20

Clear

Deletes the image history in the sensor.

-

6-16

Logging Settings

Settings cannot be changed during running.

-

6-17

Displays the USB Memory screen.

-

6-18

USB Memory

A-6

yyAutoTune as OK yyAutoTune as NG

Batch Backup

Backs up the sensor settings and image history into the USB memory.


Transfers the settings backed up into the USB memory to the sensor.

Screen Capture Settings

Saves the image displayed on the monitor into the yyON (default value) USB memory as an image yyOFF data (bmp).


yyProgram Only yyProg.+Image Hist. (default value) -

6-19

6-21

6-23

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference page

Sensor Setup

Displays the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

-

6-7

Trig

Displays when the external trigger is set.

-

4-7

Zoom

Sets the monitor to fullscreen mode. Zooming in/out can be performed.

yy1.0x (default value) yy1.5x yy2.0x yy3.0x

5-6

Tool View

Changes the display method of the tool.

yyOFF yyWindow yyProcess 1 (default value) yyProcess 2

5-7

Analysis

Displays the analysis information (statistics/ histogram).

yyOFF (default value) yyStatistics yyHistogram

5-10 5-12

View

Sensor Setup Menu screen Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference page

Program

Switches the programs to PROG_00 to PROG_31 be set.

6-8

Detail

Displays the sensor program detail screen

6-12 6-13

(Master image)

Displays the master image of the currently selected program.

(Program information)

Displays an information of selected program.

PROG_00 to PROG_31 Up to 16 characters (English and Japanese single byte characters)

6-7 6-12 6-13

Edit

Edits a program name.

Copy

Copies the selected program to uned program.

-

6-12

Initialize

Initializes the program settings.

-

6-13

Sensor Setup

Displays the Settings Navigator screen.

-

4-1

Limit Adjustment

Adjusts the threshold of selected tool.

Tool Auto Tuning

Displays the screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.

-

5-15

Sensor Advanced

Displays the sensor advanced screen.

-

6-25


0 to 100

6-12

5-14

A-7

A

Settings List

Setting range

Reference page

Displays the Sensor Image History screen.

-

6-14


-

6-14

Batch Backup

Backs up the image history in the sensor.

-

6-19

View

Displays the selected image in full-screen in the monitor.

-

5-6

Save to USB Memory

Saves the displayed image to the USB memory.

-

6-20

Auto Tuning

Performs the Tool Auto Tuning based on the displayed image.

Menu

Description

Sensor Image History View

Deletes the image history in the sensor.

Image History Settings

Sets the condition of an image yyAll to log as an image history. yyNG only (default value)

6-17

Displays the USB Memory screen.

6-18

-

-

6-16

Batch Backup

Backs up the sensor yyProgram Only settings and image history yyProg.+Image Hist. (default value) into the USB memory.

6-19


Transfers the settings backed up into the USB memory to the sensor.

6-21

Option (Transfer All Settings)

Screen Capture Settings RUN

A-8

5-20

Clear

USB Memory

A

yyAutoTune as OK yyAutoTune as NG

-

Transfers the I/O polarity, yyEnable network settings and device (disabled after the transfer) name simultaneously with yyDisabled the settings data transfer. (default value)

6-21

Saves the image displayed on the monitor into the USB memory as an image data (bmp).

6-23

Displays the run screen (menu display OFF).


yyON (default value) yyOFF -

5-2

Settings List

Monitor Settings screen Menu Sensor Connect

Description

Setting range

Reference page

Selects a connection method of the sensor and monitor.

-

6-46

Direct/Network

Switches the connection yyDirect Connection method of the sensor and yyNetwork Connection monitor.

6-46

Search Sensor

Searches for sensors on the network and perform their connection.

-

6-46

Specify Sensor

Specifies the IP address of the sensor to connect.

-

6-46

Monitor Device Settings

Network Settings

Display Settings

Touch Screen Lock

6-45

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address for the monitor.

IP Address

Displays the IP address of the monitor.

192.168.10.1 (default value)

6-48

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask 255.255.255.0 of the monitor. (default value)

6-48

Default Gateway

Displays the default gateway of the monitor.

0.0.0.0 (default value)

6-48

Manual Trigger

Sets the Manual Trigger to enable/disable.

yyEnable (default value) yyDisable

6-49

Update Image in RUN Mode

Sets whether or not to update an image displayed on the monitor during running.

yyON (default value) yyOFF

6-49

Tool Auto Tuning Guide

Sets the Tool Auto Tuning yyShow (default value) Guide to Show/Hide. yyHide

6-49

Touch Screen Lock

Sets Touch Screen Lock yyEnable function to enable/disable. yyDisable (default value)

6-50

Sets a when the Touch Screen Lock function is enabled.

6-50


-

Up to 8 characters (English and Japanese single byte characters)

6-48

A-9

A

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Monitor Environment

6-45

Language

Selects the language to be displayed on the monitor.

Time

Sets date and time.

yyEnglish yyJapanese yyDeutsch yyChinese (Simplified) yyChinese (Traditional) yyItalian yyFrench yySpanish yyPortuguese yyKorean -

Backlight Brightness

Adjusts the brightness of backlight on the monitor.

Auto Off

Sets the Auto off function yyEnable of backlight on the monitor yyDisable (default value) to Enable/Disable.

Auto Off Time Delay

Sets a time until the back light turns off when the Auto off function is enabled.

Backlight

A

Touch Calibration

Reference page

Adjusts the position to be tapped of the monitor.

1 to 7 (default value: 5)

yy30 sec yy1 min (default value) yy5 min yy10 min yy30 min -

System

6-51

6-51 6-52 6-52

6-52

6-52 6-45

Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC address, and IP address of the monitor.

-

6-53

Displays a sensor information.

-

6-43

Initialize Monitor

Initializes the settings of the monitor.

-

6-53

Update Monitor

Updates the operation software version of the monitor.

-

6-53

Monitor Information Sensor Information

A-10


Settings List

Sensor Advanced screen Menu

Description

Setting range

Environmental

6-25 IN1

Sets a detection timing of yyExt. Trigger ↑ the trigger input for IN1 yyExt. Trigger ↓ input line.

IN2 to IN6

Sets a function to the input line IN2 to IN6.

Option

Sets whether or not to write data into ROM yyYes when the external master yyNo (default value) image registration is performed.

6-26

OUT1 to OUT4

Sets the output line settings (OUT1 to 4).

yyN.O. yyN.C.

6-27


Selects an output mode.

yyLatching (default value) yyOne-Shot

6-27

Polarity

Selects the polarity (I/O format) of the sensor.

yyNPN yyPNP

6-28

I/O Monitor

Checks whether an input yyON line for control is correctly yyOFF wired or not.

6-28

Device Name

Up to 16 characters Sets a name of the sensor. (English and Japanese single byte characters)

6-29

Lock

Sets the Lock function to enable/ disable.

6-30

Sets a when the Up to 8 characters Lock function of (English and Japanese the sensor is enabled. single byte characters)

6-30

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address for the sensor.

-

6-31

IP Address

Displays the IP address of the sensor.

-

6-31

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask of the sensor.

-

6-31

Default Gateway

Displays the default gateway of the sensor.

-

6-31

Input Settings

I/O Settings Output Settings

Device Name/

Network Settings

Reference page

Security


yyOFF yyProgram bit0 to bit4 yyClear Error yyExt. Master Save

yyON yyOFF (default value)

6-26

6-26

A-11

A

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Adv. Network Settings

6-32 Transfers the image data and status result yyOFF information of the sensor yyON memory to an FTP server.

FTP Client

Displays the IP address of the FTP server.

Name

Input the name for Up to 16 characters can logging in to the FTP server. be set.

6-33

Input the for Up to 16 characters can logging in to the FTP server. be set.

6-33

Enables/disables the ive mode.

6-33

-

yyEnable yyDisable

Connection Tests the connection with Test the FTP server.

Transfer Condition

A

6-34

Selects the transfer condition of image data.

yyAll yyNG Only

6-34

File Format

Selects the file saving format for image data.

yyIVP yyBMP

6-35

Transfer Judgment Results

Transfers judgement results simultaneously with the image data.

yyEnable yyDisable

6-35

FTP Error

Turns ON the Error output function for when a file transfer failed.

yyEnable yyDisable

6-35

Folder

Displays the transfer destination folder.

Up to 16 characters can be set.

6-35

File Name

Sets the file name of the image data to be transferred.

Up to 16 characters can be set.

6-36

0-65535

6-36

Creates subfolders under yyEnable the transfer destination yyDisable folder.

6-36

Protocol

yyDisable Selects the communication yyEtherNet/IP protocol for the sensor. yyPROFINET

6-37

Handshake Control

Enables/disables the yyEnable handshake control of data. yyDisable

6-37

Create Subfolder

A-12

-

6-33

Transfer Condition

Transfer Destination Input the upper limit Folder Index of the numbers to be Settings Upper Limit appended to file names.

Field Network

6-32

IP Address

FTP Destination Settings ive Mode

FTP

Reference page


Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Setup Adjustment Tilt Correction

Image Settings Rotate 180° Image Settings White Balance (Color type only) Image Settings

Reference page 6-25

Shapes can be adjusted to the correct shape if an image displayed on the monitor is distorted.

yyOFF (default value) yyVertical yyHorizontal

6-38

Adjusts imaging for the Tilt Correction.

Same as Image Optimization

6-38

Displays the image displayed on the monitor by rotating 180°.


6-40

Adjusts imaging for the Rotate 180°.


6-40

Adjusts a white balance for the built-in camera of the sensor. Adjusts imaging for the White balance.


Program

6-41 6-41 6-25

Program Switch Method

Select a changing method for programs.

yyMonitor/PC (default value) yyExternal IN

6-42

Auto Focus Adj Pos

Sets whether or not to share the adjusting position for auto focus to all programs.

yyCommon yyIndividual (default value)

6-42

System

6-25

Sensor Information

Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and device name of the sensor.

-

6-43

Initialize Sensor

Initializes the sensor settings.

-

6-44

Update Sensor

Updates the operation software of the sensor.

-

6-44


A-13

A

Settings List

Sensor Setup screen 1. Image Optimization Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference page

Trigger Options

Internal Trigger interval: 1 to 10000 ms (default value: 50 ms) Sets an imaging timing of a target. External Trigger delay: 0 to 1000 ms (default value: 0 ms)

4-8


Automatically adjusts a image brightness.

4-11

Adjusts focus of the sensor.

Manual focusing type Auto focusing type yyAutomatic yyManual

4-12

Sets an imaging area.

yyEntire (default value) yyPartial

4-17

Bright

Adjusts brightness of an image manually.

Standard range type (color) 1 to 100 (default value: 20) Standard range type (monochrome) 1 to 120 (default value: 20) Short range type 1 to 120 (default value: 20) Long rang type 1 to 100 (default value: 20)

4-18

Imaging Mode

Select an imaging mode of the sensor.

yyNormal (default value) yyHDR yyHighGain

4-18

Focus Adjustment

Imaging Area

A

Advanced Brightness Adjustment Extended functions menu

A-14

-

Lighting

yyOFF Select a lighting mode for yyFlash (default value) the built-in light. yyContinuous

4-18

Color Filters (color type only)

Applies the color filters if an outline of a certain color OFF (default value), cannot be displayed when Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, an image is displayed in Magenta, Yellow monochrome display with the color type sensor.

4-19

Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)

Switches the digital zoom yyON to ON/OFF. yyOFF (default value)

4-19


Settings List

2. Master Registration Setting range

Reference page

s the image imaged by sensor as a master image.

-

4-21

Select Img From Image History

s the image of the image history in the memory of the sensor as a master image.

-

4-22

Select Img From USB Memory

s the image in USB memory as a master image.

-

4-24

Brightness Correction

Sets a reference of brightness to the master image.

-

4-26

Setting range

Reference page

-

4-31

Menu

Description


Extended functions menu

3. Tool Settings Menu

Description

Add Tool

Newly sets a tool.

Edit Window

Fine Tune Outline Outline

Window Shape

Select a window shape to specify an area of the target to be detected.

yy¨ Rect (default value) yy¡ Circle

4-33

Search Region

Specifies an area to search an outline of the target.

yyEntire (Without position adjustment) yyPartial (With position adjustment)

4-35

Remove Outline

Disables an unnecessary outline which interrupts yyUndo the stabilized detection, yyClear and then judges.

4-35

Selects the eraser width of yyNarrow (default value) the pen when specifying yyMiddle an unnecessary outline. yyWide

4-35

Select an extraction sensitivity of an outline.

yyHigh yyNormal (default value) yyLow

4-36

Adjusts a threshold used in anomaly detection.


4-33

Sets an angle limit for detecting outlines to the rotating direction.

0 to ±180° (default value: ± 20°)

4-38

Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle.


4-38

Select a detection mode for outline search.

yyHigh Accuracy yyHigh Speed (default value)

4-38

Eraser Width Sensitivity

Limit Adjustment Rotation Range Margin Extended functions menu Search Algorithm Tool Name

Up to 8 characters Sets an arbitrary name to (English and Japanese the tool. single byte characters)


4-39 A-15

A

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference page

Window Shape

Select a window shape to specify the area of a target to be extracted.

yy¨ Rect (default value) yy¡ Circle yyEntire

4-42

Mask

Adds a rectangular/ circular mask region in the tool window frame. Adds a rectangular/ circular cutting region in the mask region.

yyAdd Mask yyCut Mask

4-45

Tap a color to be extracted on the master image and sets an extraction range.

yyExtract Area [+] yyExtract Area [-] yyUndo yyClear

4-42

Edit Window

Color Extraction (For color type)

A color range to be extracted can be set on to Live Image the Live image of the target. Brightness Extraction (For monochrome type)

A

Color Area/ Area

yyExtraction Range (0 to 255) yyUndo yyClear

4-42

4-42

A brightness range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.

-

4-42



4-42

Upper Limit

Sets the upper limit of a threshold.

yyEnable yyDisable (default value)

4-46

Scale

When an upper limit is Enable, select a threshold scale matching the coincidence range required for judgment.

yy0-200 (default value) yy0-999

4-46

Advanced Color Extraction (Color type)

Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB (H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness).

yyH : 0 to 359° yyS : 0 to 255 yyB : 0 to 255

4-49

Advanced Brightness Extended Extraction functions (Monochrome type) menu

Specifies a brightness value to be extracted.

0 to 255

4-49

to Live Image Limit Adjustment

Upper Limit

A-16

Tap brightness to be extracted on the master image and sets an extraction range.

-

Tool Name

Up to 8 characters Sets an arbitrary name to (English and Japanese the tool. single byte characters)

4-49

Fixed Reference Area

Select a condition which yyDisable the matching rate of the yyEnable: Large Color Area/Area is 100%. yyEnable: Small

4-50


Settings List

Menu

Edit Window

Pos. Adj.

Fine Tune Outline

Description

Setting range

Reference page

Window Shape

Select a window shape to specify an area of the target to be detected.

yy¨ Rect (default value) yy¡ Circle

4-53

Search Region

Specifies an area to search an outline of the target.

yyEntire yyPartial

4-55

Remove Outline

Disables an unnecessary outline which interrupts yyUndo the stabilized detection, yyClear and then judges.

4-55

Selects the eraser width of yyNarrow (default value) the pen when specifying yyMiddle an unnecessary outline. yyWide

4-55

Select an extraction sensitivity of an outline.

yyHigh yyNormal (default value) yyLow

4-55



4-53

Sets an angle limit for adjusting position to the rotating direction.

0 to ±180° (default value: ± 20°)

4-57

Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle.


4-57

Eraser Width Sensitivity

Limit Adjustment Rotation Extended Range functions menu Margin Edit Tool

Edits the settings of the tool which has already been set.

-

4-31

Delete Tool

Deletes an unnecessary tool.

-

4-31


Copies the tool which has been set and pastes it to the same position. This is for the Outline tool and the Color Area/Area tool.

-

4-58

Copy Tool


A-17

A

Settings List

4. Output Assignment Menu

A

Description

Setting range

Reference page

4-60

OUT1 to OUT4

Sets the output items to be assigned to the output line.

yyTotal Status yyTot. StatusNG yyRUN yyBUSY yyError yyPos. Adj. yyJudge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16) yyLogical operation result of each tool (Logic 1 to Logic 4) yyOFF (not used)

Trigger Error

Selects whether to ON/OFF the output when the trigger error occurred.


4-60

Logic

Selects the logical operation method of logics.

yyAND yyOR

4-63

(Tool selection)

Select tools to be assigned to the logic.

yyUnused yyUsed yyUsed (Inverse)

4-63

Selects a condition for the total status result.

yyAll Tools OK yyAny Tools OK yyLogic 1 to 4

4-65


Logic Settings (Logic 1 to 4)

Total Status Conditions

A-18


Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Symptom

Check point

The PWR/ERR indicator light An error occurred. Check the of the sensor or the PWR errors from lighting or blinking indicator light of the monitor in red. is lighting or blinking in red. An error message is displayed on the monitor. The power is not supplied to the sensor or monitor does not turn on.

Reference page

Refer to "Error Message". A-22

Check the details of the error message.

Refer to "Error Message".

Is the power cable correctly connected?

Connect the power cable correctly.

2-12

Is the voltage or capacity of the power source meet the specification?

Use a power source of the correct rating.

8-2

Is the installed distance of the target correct?

Place a target at the correct installed distance. The installed distance depends on the sensor type.

2-2

Is the sensor view correct?

Place the sensor in such a way that the sensor view matches the target size.

2-2

Is the focus adjustment correct?

Adjust the focusing position (focus) of the sensor.

4-12

Adjust the brightness of the sensor.

4-11

Is the brightness adjustment An image is not displayed on correct? the monitor, or the image is Is the target or the sensor abnormal. vibrating? Does the ambient light affect the image?

Devise anti-vibration measures etc. Use brightness correction. Place the do to prevent the incident of ambient light.

A-22

4-26 -

Clean the front cover. Replace it with the spare front cover (OP-87461).

A-41

Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].

6-49

Is the front cover dirty or damaged?

The image or the status result is not updated.

Remedy

Is the system in the setting mode?

yyStart the run mode yyTurn on the power of the sensor again.

5-2

Is the trigger correctly input?

If a target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a nonvoltage input circuit. When PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables.

2-12

All or part of the settings necessary for running have not been completed.

Complete the settings in Settings Navigator.


4-1

A-19

A

Troubleshooting

Symptom

Check point

Remedy

The status result is displayed Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update but the image is not. in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].

Image update is slow. (during operation/setting)

The monitor cannot be operated using the touch .

The network may be affected by the traffic in the in-plant LAN. Configure a local network and Is the network connected to the confirm the network connection in-plant LAN? only for the IV Series.

The status result is not output.

-

6-49

Is the input screen for the unlock displayed?

The touch screen lock of the monitor or the lock of the sensor is enabled. Input the unlock .

6-30 6-50

The is lost and cannot unlock.

your nearest KEYENCE office.

-

Is the output line correctly connected?

Correctly connect to the external devices.

2-12

Is the output setting correctly set?

Set the output line and output settings correctly in the Settings Navigator.

4-60

Is the system in the setting mode?

Start the run mode

Is the threshold correctly set?

Set the threshold correctly.

5-14

Is the tool correctly set?

yySet the detection tool correctly. yySet the position adjustment tool correctly.

4-28

Is the Polarity correctly set?

Set the NPN or PNP according to the circuits of the external devices.

6-28

Set the N.O. (normally open) Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly or N.C. (normally closed) set? according to the circuits of the external devices.

A-20

6-49

Set the function of Update Image in the RUN mode to OFF.

Are not there any damage or crack on the touch screen?

A

Reference page


5-2

6-27

Troubleshooting

Symptom

An external trigger cannot be input.

Check point

Image data cannot be transferred via FTP.

Reference page

Is the trigger condition set to [External]?

Select [External] in Trigger Options.

4-8

Is the input line correctly connected?


2-12

Has the input setting been made correctly?

Make the input line and input settings correctly in [Input Settings].

6-26

Has the Polarity been correctly set?

When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a non-voltage input circuit. When the PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables.

6-28

The program number cannot Has the switching method for be changed with the input the programs been correctly line. set?

The monitor and sensor cannot be connected to.

Remedy

Set the switching method for the programs to [External IN].

6-42

Has the input line been correctly connected?


2-12

Has the input setting been correctly set?

Set the input line and input settings correctly in [Input Settings].

6-26

Has the Polarity been correctly set?

When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a non-voltage input circuit. When the PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables.

6-28

Check the cables and settings.

Refer to “Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor” (Page A-28).

A-28

Check the cables and settings.

Refer to “Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable”

A-38


A-21

A

Error Messages

Error Messages Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor The causes of, and remedies for, an error can be checked by observing the indicator light of the sensor. PWR/ERR indicator light

PWR/ERR indicator status ON Green

Blink

A ON

Red

Blink

A-22

Cause

Remedy

In operation.

-

Setting in progress. Operation stopped.

-

A system error occurred.

yyTurn on the power of this device. yyIf the same error occurs, your nearest KEYENCE office.

A startup memory read error occurred. yyA data abnormality occurred due to noise or because the power switched OFF while writing was in progress.

yyInitialize the settings. yyIf the same error occurs, your nearest KEYENCE office.

A trigger error occurred. A judgment process is not performed. yyIf a target is to be imaged using an external trigger, the external trigger will be input during a BUSY status. yyIf a target is to be imaged using an internal trigger, the trigger interval will become shorter than the processing time.

yyThe trigger error can be fixed using one of the following procedure. yyNext normal trigger input yyClear Error input yySwitching the program number yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor yyDo not input an external trigger during a BUSY status. yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value that is longer than the processing time. yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [OFF] described in output assignment for the Settings Navigator (Page 4-60).

An external master image registration error (without ed master image) occurred. The master image is not updated. yyThe image to be ed as a master image was not imaged. yyThe work memory is insufficient.

yyAn external master image registration error can be fixed using one of the following procedures. yySuccessful next external master image registration yyClearing the Error input yySwitching the program number yyProceeding to the settings screen for sensor yyTaking an image to be ed as a master image and it as an external master image. yyDeleting one or more detection tools.


Error Messages

PWR/ERR indicator status

Red

Blink

OFF

Cause

Remedy

The external master image registration error (with yyAn external master image registration error can be ed master image) fixed using one of the following procedures. occurred. The following errors occurred even though yySuccessful next external master image registration the image was updated and yyClearing the Error input ed as a master image. yySwitching the program number yyFor the new master image, yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor the outline cannot be yyChecking that the image to be ed and the extracted with the outline tool. detection tools/position adjustment settings are yyFor the new master image, applicable. the area cannot be extracted with the color area/area tool. An FTP error occurred. The following errors occurred. yyConnection with the FTP server failed. yyTranfer to the transfer destination folder failed. yyThe transfer speed could not catch up the sensor processing speed.

An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following procedures. yyClick the [OK] button on the Error screen. yyClear Error input. yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.

yyPower is not supplied to this device. yyDuring focusing position adjustment. (Manual focus type only)

yyConnect the power cable correctly. yyUse a power source of the correct rating. yyComplete the focusing position adjustment.

Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON. “Cables” (Page 2-12) “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)


A-23

A

Error Messages

Confirming error messages of the monitor Message Sensor system error happens. Turn on sensor. If not turned on, local service center.

Cause A system error occurred in the sensor. yyIt is conceivable that a fault occurred inside the sensor.

Sensor internal memory reading has failed.

A

Remedy yyTurn on the power of the sensor again. yyIf the same error occurs, your nearest KEYENCE office.

A memory read error occurred when the sensor started. Turn on or initialize sensor. yyA data trouble occurred. yyIt is conceivable that After this message is closed, [Initialize] button will be displayed. the power was switched OFF during writing, or noise was picked up.

yyInitialize the settings following the instructions on the screen. yyTurn on the power of the sensor again. yyDo not turn OFF the power while saving the settings. yyIf the same error occurs, your nearest KEYENCE office.

Sensor program xx is damaged. Initialization is necessary.

yyInitialize the settings following the instructions on the screen. yyTurn on the power of the sensor again. yyDo not turn OFF the power while saving the settings. yyIf the same error occurs, your nearest KEYENCE office.

A memory read error occurred when the sensor started. After this message is closed, yyA data trouble occurred [Initialize] button will be displayed. during the execution of program number xx. yyIt is conceivable that the power was switched OFF during writing, or noise was picked up. Trigger error

A-24

A trigger error occurred. yyAn trigger error can be fixed Judgment processing has using one of the following not been executed. procedure. yyIf a target is to be yyNext normal trigger input imaged using an yyClearing the Error input external trigger, the yySwitching the program external trigger will be number input during a BUSY yyProceeding to the settings status. screen of the sensor yyIf a target is to be yyDo not input the external trigger imaged using an during a BUSY status. internal trigger, the yySet the trigger interval of the trigger interval will internal trigger to a value that become shorter than is longer than the processing time. the processing time. yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [OFF] described in output assignment for the Settings Navigator (Page 4-60).


Output/ Indicator

*1

*1

*1

*2

Error Messages

Message

Cause

Remedy

An external master image yyAn external master image registration error can be fixed registration error (with using one of the following ed master image) procedures. occurred. The following errors occurred even yySuccessful next external master image registration though the image was updated and ed yyClearing the Error input Some tools can not correctly as a master image. yySwitching the program judged because area is 0 as a number yyFor the new master result of “Ext. Master Save”. image, the outline yyProceeding to the settings (Matching rate is 0.) cannot be extracted screen of the sensor Check tool configuration. with the outline tool. yyChecking that the image to be ed and the detection Brightness of brightness adjustment yyFor the new master image, the area cannot tools/position adjustment area is not adjustable as a result of be extracted with the settings are applicable. “Ext. Master Save”. Color Area/Area tool. yyAdjusting the brightness of the Check configuration of brightness image to be ed properly. yyThe brightness adjustment. correction cannot be performed correctly for the new master image.

Output/ Indicator

Some tools can not correctly judge because of insufficient outline extraction amount as a result of “Ext. Master Save”. (Matching rate is 0.) Check tool configuration.

Outer master registration fails because image is not captured.

Outer master registration fails because of lack of work memory.

An external master image yyAn external master image registration error (with no registration error can be fixed ed master image) using one of the following occurred. The master procedures. image is not updated. yySuccessful in next external master image registration yyThe image to be ed as a master yyClearing the Error input image was not imaged. yySwitching the program number yyThe work memory is insufficient. yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor yyTaking an image to be ed as a mater image and ing it as an external master image. yyDeleting one or more detection tools.

Monitor fatal error (XXX) occurred. A system error occurred yyTurn on the monitor power again. your nearest KEYENCE in the monitor. yyIf the same error occurs, office. your nearest KEYENCE yyIt is conceivable that a fault occurred inside the office. Monitor system error happens. monitor.

*2

A

*2

*3

Turn on monitor. If not turned on, local service center.


A-25

Error Messages

Message

Cause

Remedy

Connecting to sensor…

Connection is not possible Refer to “Remedy when the because there is no Monitor cannot be Connected response from the sensor. with the Sensor” (Page A-28).

Connecting to sensor (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX)…

Connection is not possible because there is no response from the sensor with the specified IP address.

Output/ Indicator

*4

Communication timeout to sensor Connection is not possible because there is no happens. response from the sensor. Data transfer to sensor fails.

A

Connection is not possible because data transmission to the sensor has failed.

Specified sensor is being Connection is not possible Disconnect the presently connected to other PC or monitor. because the specified sensor connected monitor or PC and is connected to a different then re-connect it. monitor or a different PC. Only one monitor or PC can be connected to a sensor at the same time. Writing in file fails.

File saving to the USB memory failed.

Replace the USB memory.

Access to file or folder fails.

Access to the USB memory failed.

yyFormat the USB memory. yyReplace the USB memory.

Data saving has failed. If it happens repeatedly: yyReplace USB memory. yyFormat USB memory.

The USB memory is broken.

Disk space is insufficient.

Saving is not possible because the amount of free space of the USB memory is insufficient.

A-26

Increase the amount of free space by deleting files in the USB memory or by formatting.


*4

Error Messages

Message

Cause

Remedy

This file configuration data is for xxxx. This file is not readable.

The setting files for a Read the setting files of a sensor different model of sensors of the same model. cannot be read.

FTP Connection Error

Connection with the FTP server failed.

FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)

Data transfer to the transfer destination folder failed.

FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)

Data which is larger than the remaining storage of the FTP buffer has been created and the transfer failed.

Output/ Indicator

“Remedy when data Refer to transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-38).

*2

*1 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red), PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red) *2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red), PWR indicator light of the monitor: Blinking (red) *3 PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red) *4 SENSOR indicator light of the monitor: Off


A

A-27

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor Remedy when direct connection is unavailable Status

Remedy

Retries occur repeatedly because connection is not possible. The status is as shown below. yyConnection is not possible after power ON. yyConnection is not possible using the [Connect] button of the sensor connection setup screen.

yySupply power to the sensor. yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly with a monitor cable. “Connecting directly” (Page 2-16) yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of a retry, the run screen opens automatically. yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel] button or [OK] button is tapped. Tap the [Connect] button after a correct connection has been established.

If the problem is not solved using one of the above remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings. “Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-40)

A yyThe error (381) "Data transfer to sensor fails." may also be displayed. yyConnection became impossible after connection was established once.

yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly with a monitor cable. “Connecting directly” (Page 2-16) yyTap the [OK] button and close the message. yyIn the case of a network connection, change the configuration to network connection. “When connecting with the sensor via a network” (Page 6-46) The network is connected to other network devices such as multiple sensors or computers.

A-28



Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable Status

Remedy yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment. “Connecting via network” (Page 2-16) yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of retry, the run screen opens automatically.

Retries occur repeatedly because connection is not possible after the power is turned on.

The Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel] button or [OK] button is tapped.

yyTap the [Connect] button after a correct connection has established.

yyAn error (381) "Data transfer to sensor fails." may also be displayed. yyConnection became impossible after connection was established once.

yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor. “Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network” (Page 6-47) If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the connection cannot be established by searching for the sensor” (Page A-30). yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect the sensor. “Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the sensor” (Page 6-48) If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor” (Page A-31).


A-29

A


Status

Remedy When the connection cannot be established by searching for the sensor yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment. “Connecting via network” (Page 2-16)

The sensor was not found using the [Search Sensor] button on the Sensor Connect screen.

yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway. “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor” (Page A-36) yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the monitor or other devices. Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor. “When directly connecting with the sensor” (Page 6-46) “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-37) “Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-40)

A

yyThe following conditions are required for a successful sensor search. yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and monitor are matched. yyThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address is not duplicated.

A-30



Status

Remedy When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment. “Connecting via network” (Page 2-16) yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor.

yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, establish a connection using the [Search Sensor] button. Connection is not possible using the [Specify “Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network” Sensor] button or the [Connect] button on (Page 6-47) the Sensor Connect screen. yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway. “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor” (Page A-36) yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the monitor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway. Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor. “When directly connecting with the sensor” (Page 6-46) “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-37) “Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-40) yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor. “Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network” (Page 6-47) “When the If a connection is unavailable, refer to connection cannot be established by searching for the sensor” (Page A-30).

First connection after purchasing, or connection after monitor initialization.

yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect. “Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the sensor” (Page 6-48) If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor” (Page A-31).


A-31

A


Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light Displays the link status with the network. LINK/ACT indicator light

Status of the LINK/ACT indicator light

A

Remedy

ON

Correct link with the monitor or the Ethernet switch.

Blink

Correct link with the monitor or the Ethernet switch. Data are being sent and received.

Green

OFF

A-32

Status

Link is normal. When connection with the monitor is not possible, check the STATUS indicator light.

No correct link with the monitor or the Ethernet yySupply power to the sensor. switch. yySupply power to the monitor or the Ethernet switch of yyPower is not supplied to this the connection target. unit or the connection target. yyConnect the cable correctly. yyThe cable is not connected correctly.



STATUS indicator light Indicates the connection status within the monitor. Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS indicator light. STATUS indicator light

Status of the STATUS indicator light

ON

Green Blink

OFF

Status

Remedy

Correct connection with the monitor. The connection with the monitor has been established by acquiring the IP address.

-

No correct connection with the monitor. The IP address of the sensor has been acquired, but connection with the monitor has not been established.

For direct connection “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable” (Page A-28) For network connection “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page A-29)

For direct connection “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable” No correct connection with the (Page A-28) monitor. The IP address of the sensor For network connection has not been acquired. “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page A-29)

yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute. yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the monitor screen may fail to be updated while the STATUS indicator light turned on, or the monitor may not accept an operation. yyDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected monitor cannot be connected.


A-33

A


Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor The causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor. SENSOR indicator light

Status of the SENSOR indicator light ON

A

Green Blink

OFF

Status

Remedy

Correct connection with the sensor. No correct connection with the sensor. The link with the sensor or the Ethernet switch has been established, but connection with the sensor has not been established.

For direct connection “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable” (Page A-28) For network connection “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page A-29)

No correct connection with the yySupply power to the monitor. sensor. yySupply power to the sensor or the Ethernet switch of The link with the sensor or the the connection target. Ethernet switch has not been yyConnect the cable correctly. established.

yyThe communication timeout interval is 1 minute. yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated while the SENSOR indicator light in on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.

A-34



Other methods of confirming a network connection

3 Input the IP address of the sensor whose existence is to be confirmed and tap the [Ping Test] button.

Confirming the existence of the sensor from the monitor Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can be confirmed by performing a test communication from the monitor to the sensor to be connected.

1 Displays the Sensor Connect screen.

The confirmation result will be displayed on the monitor.

When the confirmation result is “OK” zz When the confirmation result is “NG” zz

For the first startup of the monitor or after zz monitor initialization

“Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Network Connection)” (Page 3-7)

If not connected with the sensor via a zz network

Automatically opens after the power is turned on.

If connected with the sensor via a network zz “When connecting with the sensor via a network” (Page 6-46) When the monitor and the sensor are connected via a network, the [Network Connection] will be displayed and the IP address of the connected sensor will be displayed.

2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.

If the displayed confirmation result is „„ “NG”

Confirm the following contents. yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment. “Connecting via network” (Page 2-16) y Correctly set the IP address, the subnet mask, y and the default gateway of the monitor and sensor. “Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-8) “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor” (Page A-36) “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-37) The existence confirmation function utilizes the ping command. Note that even when this is executed for devices other than a sensor, confirmation will succeed if there is a response to the ping command.


A-35

A


Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor

1 Open the Monitor Device Settings screen.

If not connected with the sensor via zz network

After the power turned on, the Sensor Connect screen opens automatically. Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button.

If connected with the sensor via a network zz “Monitor Settings” (Page 6-45)

2 Tap the [Network Settings] button.

4 After confirmation/setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

yyIf the setting has not been changed, system returns to the Monitor Settings screen. yyIf the setting has been changed, the message "Monitor will be restarted." appears.

5 Tap the [OK] button if the setting has been changed.

The monitor restarts.

If the monitor could be connected with the zz sensor

The run screen opens.

If the monitor could not be connected with zz the sensor

The Sensor Connect screen opens. Set the connection method etc. and connect the monitor with the sensor. “Sensor Connect” (Page 6-45)

A

The monitor network setting screen opens.

3 Confirm the IP address of the monitor.

For details of the connection method after initial startup of the monitor or after monitor initialization (Page 3-13), refer to “Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Network Connection)” (Page 3-7).

To change the settings, tap the [Edit] button and display the editing screen. Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.

A-36



Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor

5 Confirm the IP address of the sensor.

Directly connect the sensor and monitor, and confirm the IP address of the sensor. After returning to the network connection, set the confirmed IP address of the sensor, and then confirm whether or not to connect with the sensor.

1 Directly connect the monitor and the

sensor of the confirmation/setting target. “Connecting directly” (Page 2-16) “When directly connecting with the sensor” (Page 6-46)



3 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.

yyTapping the [Edit] button displays the screen to edit the address. Set the arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button. yyWhen the [Reset] button is tapped, the setup values for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default Gateway] will be reset and nothing will be set. Again, set an arbitrary address.

6 After confirmation/setting is completed, tap the [OK] button and exit from the network settings.

7 Turn OFF the power and connect the sensor and monitor via a network.

A

“Connecting via network” (Page 2-16)

8 Turn on the power.

If the monitor could be connected with the zz sensor

The run screen opens.

4 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then the [Network Settings] button.

If the monitor could not be connected with zz the sensor

The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the connection method etc. and connect with the sensor. “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page A-29)

Confirming the router settings When a router is used, confirm that the following port is opened. Sensor : 63000 (default value) For the setting methods of the sensor port number, refer to the following. “Network Settings” (Page 6-31) yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68. yyThe FTP port number can be changed on the server. It is generally 20 or 21. - IV Series 's Manual (Monitor) -

A-37


Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable Status

Remedy

Connection with the FTP server failed.

yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it correctly. yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it correctly. Moreover, confirm the firewall software on the PC whether the port is available or not. yyConfirm the name for logging in to the FTP server and set it correctly. yyConfirm the for logging in to the FTP server and set it correctly.

“FTP Destination Settings” (Page 6-33)

A

Data transfer to the transfer destination folder failed.

yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder is not granted. Acquire the access authorization of the transfer destination folder and perform the operation again. yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the transfer destination folder name which has been set. If a file with the same name exists, change the file name or change the transfer destination folder. “Transfer Destination Folder Settings” (Page 6-35) yyWhen you switched from the [Run] screen to the [Program] screen, the screen is switched to the [Program] screen after the transfer of untransferred data has finished.

If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the transfer will be forcibly finished and the Error screen will appear.

A-38



Status

Remedy yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor. “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-10) yyConfirm the stress status of the network.

Data which is larger than the remaining storage of the FTP buffer has been created and the transfer failed.

A


A-39

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch) The network settings such as the IP address can be initialized to the factory default by means of the IP reset switch of the sensor. yyThe IP reset switch is used when ing the sensor used in another network to a new network, or when trouble occurs during connection. yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor. The connection will be interrupted.

Setting Items

Settings after initialization

Communication speed

100/10Mbps Automatically switches

IP Address

A

BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) 0.0.0.0*1, *2 *2

Subnet Mask

0.0.0.0

Default Gateway

0.0.0.0*2

1 Remove the fixing screw of the front cover indicated by the

Remove only the fixing screw of the front cover indicated by the mark. Do not remove the front cover.

mark

2 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in

diameter) into the screw hole and press the IP reset switch for about 3 seconds.

*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP client function can be used. Do not assign an IP address from the BOOTP server or DH server except the monitor to be connected. *2 In the Network Settings screen of the sensor, [Empty] is displayed. “Network Settings” (Page 6-31)

Connecting method after initialization For direct connection „„ Connects automatically with BOOTP. There is no need to set the IP address. “When directly connecting with the sensor” (Page 6-46)

Long and thin pin

The STATUS indicator light will blink twice (orange) and then turn off. The network setting is initialized.

3 Tighten the fixing screw of the front cover. yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

For network connection „„ Search for the sensor to be connected. Search will be made for a sensor without IP address, set the IP address by following the instructions on the screen. “When connecting with the sensor via a network” (Page 6-46) A-40

mark.

Indicator light

Settings after initialization

IP address setting method

Initializing the network settings


Maintenance

Maintenance Attaching the protection sheet A protection sheet (OP-87463) can be attached to protect the LCD .

1 Remove the backing film (transparent) from the back and front sides of the protection sheet.

Replacing the front cover The front cover can be replaced with the optional spare front cover (OP-87461) if it became dirty or damaged. Replace the front cover with the correct procedure by following the precautions below. Otherwise the enclosure rating (IP67) may not be maintained. yyDo not let dust or dirt stick to the O-shaped ring. yyAttach the O-shaped ring on the correct position.

1 Remove the old front cover and the O-shaped ring.

O-shaped ring (small) Backing film (back)

O-shaped ring (large)

Adhesive side (back of the protection sheet)

A

Protection sheet Backing film (front)

Front cover Dedicated screw

2 Apply the protection sheet on the monitor display with the tab at the lower right.

2 Install the front cover after embedding the O-shaped ring.

yyScrew: Dedicated screw × 2 Use the attached dedicated screw. yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m O-shaped ring (small)

Tab

O-shaped ring (large)

Protection sheet

Apply the protection film while make sure that no trash tucked in.

Dedicated screw


Front cover

A-41

Index

Index Numerics

C

1. Image Optimization....................................... A-14 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target).....4-6 2. Master Registration....................................... A-15 2. Master Registration (ing an Image as a Reference for Judgment)............4-20 3. Tool Settings.................................................. A-15 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28 4. Output Assignment........................................ A-18 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line).....4-60

A

A

Achieving adequate image brightness...............5-33 If the brightness cannot be adjusted due to uneven brightness........................................5-33 If the brightness cannot be adjusted in the Auto Brightness Adjustment....................5-33 Achieving good focus.........................................5-34 If good focus cannot be achieved by the Auto Focus Adjustment...........................5-34 Adding a tool......................................................4-31 Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool............................4-31 Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)........5-36 Adjusting the installed distance (WD).................5-32 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14 Advanced Brightness Adjustment.......................4-18 Advanced Color Extraction/ Advanced Brightness Extraction........................4-49 Advanced Network Settings...............................6-32 Attaching the protection sheet........................... A-41 Auto Brightness Adjustment...............................4-11 Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only).........................................6-42

B Backing up in a batch.........................................6-19 Backlight.............................................................6-52 Basic adjustments........................... 5-37, 5-38, 5-39 Basic configurations of IV Series..........................1-2 Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4 Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-14 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3 Bracket......................................................... 1-9, 8-9 Brightness correction..........................................4-26

A-42

Cables................................................................2-12 Cancelling One-Shot output.................................7-6 Capturing the monitor screen and saving to the USB memory.................................6-23 Capturing the screen..........................................6-23 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-8 Changing Over.....................................................7-7 Changing the logging conditions of the image history................................................6-17 Changing the timing of the status output..............7-6 Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor....... A-22 Checking the Package Contents..........................1-8 Checking the view and installed distance.............2-2 Clearing Errors...................................................7-10 Clearing the saved images.................................6-16 Color Area/Area tool...........................................4-40 Color Filters (color type only).............................4-19 Communication Cable........................................1-12 Confirming error messages of the monitor........ A-24 Confirming or deleting the images ed for the Tool Auto Tuning....5-25 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor........................................................ A-36 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor.......................................................... A-37 Confirming the existence of the sensor from the monitor.............................. A-35 If the displayed confirmation result is “NG”.... A-35 Confirming the router settings........................... A-37 Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor......... A-32 Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor........ A-34 Connecting directly.............................................2-16 Connecting method after initialization............... A-40 For direct connection................................... A-40 For network connection............................... A-40 Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors......1-3 Connecting the monitor and single sensor...........1-2 Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable....2-17 Connecting the power cable of the monitor........2-15 Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor....2-12 Connecting the sensor and monitor...................2-16 Connecting via network......................................2-16 Connection Cable...............................................8-13 Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2 Copying a program.............................................6-12 Copy Tool............................................................4-58 Correcting the distorted images due to the installation..........................................................5-33 Cut-off process of the matching rate................... A-5


Index

D

F

Default value......................................................4-60 Deleting a tool....................................................4-31 Device name......................................................6-29 Device settings...................................................6-29 Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)...............4-19 Dimensions...........................................................8-6 DIN mounting adapter...............................1-11, 8-12 Displaying and outputting the status result.......... A-4 Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment............................ A-4 Displaying from the run screen................. 6-14, 6-18 Displaying from the Sensor setup menu screen................ 6-14, 6-18 Displaying the histogram....................................5-12 Displaying the Sensor Image History screen.....6-14 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-7 Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...............4-5 Displaying the statistical information..................5-10 Displaying the USB Memory screen...................6-18 Display Method of Extended Functions Menus....4-66 Display methods for tools.....................................5-7 For color type..................................................5-7 For monochrome type.....................................5-8 Display Settings..................................................6-49 Dome attachment......................................... 1-8, 8-7

E Editing a program name.....................................6-12 Editing a tool.......................................................4-31 Editing the tool window.......................................3-15 Editing the value with the slider..........................3-14 Enabling the screen capturing function..............6-23 Enlarging the image display.................................5-6 Environmental....................................................6-25 Error Messages................................................. A-22 Ethernet cable....................................................8-13 Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).....................1-12 Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation..............................................................5-2 Extended functions for the Image Optimization....4-16 Extended functions for the Master Registration....4-22 Extended functions for the Outline tool..............4-37 Extended functions for the Output Assignment....4-62 Extended functions for the Position Adjustment tool...............................4-57 Extended functions for the Tool settings.............4-58 Extended functions items for the Output Assignment.........................................................4-62 Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool....4-48 External trigger.....................................................7-2

Field Network.....................................................6-37 Finishing by completing all steps..........................4-5 Finishing the Settings Navigator...........................4-5 Finishing without completing the step..................4-5 Fixed Reference Area.........................................4-50 Flow in the Settings Navigator..............................4-2 Flow of the internal process...............................5-40 Focus Adjustment...............................................4-12 Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type......4-12 Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type....4-14 Folder composition and file naming rules...........6-24 For the processing time......................................5-40 Front cover...........................................................8-8 Front cover (for replacement)...............................1-9 FTP.....................................................................6-32 FTP Destination Settings....................................6-33

H Hanging on the hook............................................2-8 Hiding the histogram..........................................5-13 Hiding the statistical information.........................5-11

A

I Imaging Area......................................................4-17 Imaging the target widely...................................5-32 Importing the individual status output of each detection tool/logic.......................................7-5 Importing the Status Output.................................7-4 Importing the total status output...........................7-4 Infrared polarization filter attachment...................1-8 Initialize Monitor.................................................6-53 Initializing a program..........................................6-13 Initializing the monitor.........................................3-13 Initializing the network settings.......................... A-40 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-40 Initializing the sensor................................ 3-12, 6-44 Input circuit.........................................................2-14 Input Response Time.........................................7-12 Description for symbols................................7-12 Response time for the error clear input........7-12 Response time for the external master registration input...........................................7-12 Response time for the switch program input...............................7-12 Input Settings.....................................................6-26 Inputting characters............................................3-16 Installed distance of the dome attachment...........2-6 Installing/Removing the USB memory................6-18 Installing the sensor at an angle.........................5-35 Installing the USB memory.................................6-18


A-43

Index

Intelligent Monitor.............................. 1-10, 8-4, 8-10 Internal trigger......................................................7-3 I/O Monitor..........................................................6-28 I/O Settings.........................................................6-26 Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization.......................................................4-16 Items of extended functions for the Master Registration........................................................4-22 Items of extended functions for the Tool settings..................................................4-58 IV Series...............................................................1-4

J Judgment processing flow....................................1-6

L Language...........................................................6-51 Lighting...............................................................4-18 LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light............... A-32 List of the Useful Features...................................6-2 Loading and confirming the saved images.........6-15 Logic Settings.....................................................4-63

A

M Main screen for the Image Optimization...............4-7 Main screen for the Master Registration............4-20 Main screen for the Output Assignment.............4-60 Main screen for the Tool Settings.......................4-30 Maintenance...................................................... A-41 Mask settings.....................................................4-45 Master image registration from the image history in the sensor..........................4-22 Matching rate at the time of protrusion................ A-5 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5 Menu Screen........................................................5-4 Monitor...............................................................1-15 Monitor cable......................................................8-13 Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)..................1-12 Monitor Device Settings.....................................6-45 Monitor Environment..........................................6-45 Monitor Information............................................6-53 Monitor power cable...........................................8-12 Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)......1-10 Monitor Settings.................................................6-45 Monitor Settings screen....................................... A-9 Mounting adapter......................................... 1-9, 8-8 Mounting the attachment......................................2-6 Mounting the dome attachment............................2-6 Mounting the Monitor............................................2-8 Mounting the mounting adapter............................2-4 Mounting from the jig side...............................2-4 A-44

Mounting on the wall.......................................2-4 Mounting the sensor.............................................2-4 Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2 Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter....2-4 Mounting to a ............................................2-10 Mounting to a wall................................................2-8 Mounting to the DIN rail......................................2-11 Mounting using DIN mounting adapter...............2-11 Mounting with the wall mounting adapter.............2-8

N Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-13 Name and function of each part of the sensor...1-13 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen......5-4 Network Settings...................................... 6-31, 6-48 No-voltage input (When the NPN output is selected)....................2-14

O Operating in the shortest cycle.............................7-3 Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..............5-16 Operation flow when the power is turned on........3-5 Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Direct Connection)..............................................3-6 Operation for initial startup of the monitor (Network Connection)...........................................3-7 Operation for initial startup of the sensor...........3-11 Operation of the indicator light...........................1-14 Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on...........................................................7-11 Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5 Optional parts for the monitor................... 1-10, 8-12 Optional parts for the sensor........................ 1-8, 8-7 Other methods of confirming a network connection........................................ A-35 Outline tool.........................................................4-32 Output circuit......................................................2-14 Output Settings...................................................6-27 Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4 Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2 Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3 Overview of the program functions.......................6-8


Index

P cutting dimension.....................................2-10 mounting adapter............................1-11, 8-12 Lock...................................................6-30 Polarity...............................................................6-28 Polarized visible light filter attachment.................1-8 Polarizing filter attachment...................................8-8 Position Adjustment tool.....................................4-51 Power I/O cable....................................................8-8 Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)...........1-9 Preparation flow...................................................6-9 Preparation procedures........................................6-9 Preparing the program functions..........................6-9 Processing during an operation..........................5-36 Program..............................................................6-25 Program Switch Method.....................................6-42 Protection sheet....................................... 1-10, 8-12

R Reducing the effect of illumination variation.......5-36 Reducing the image blur....................................5-34 Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface................................5-35 ing from the image in the USB memory................................................4-24 When using batch backup files (*.iva)...........4-24 When using image capture files (*.ivp).........4-25 ing the images from the file saved in the USB memory......................5-22 ing the images from the image history saved in the sensor................5-20 ing the images taken in the Test mode....5-18 ing the master image............................4-21 ing the Master Image..............................7-8 ing the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning...........................................5-18 Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable........................................................ A-29 Remedy when direct connection is unavailable.... A-28 Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor............................... A-28 Removing the USB memory...............................6-18 Replacing the front cover.................................. A-41 Rotate 180°........................................................6-40 Rotation Range........................................ 4-38, 4-57 RUN screen (menu display OFF)........................ A-6 RUN screen (menu display ON).......................... A-6

S Saving the image history individually.................6-20 Saving the Sensor Settings or Images to the USB Memory...............................6-18

Saving the sensor settings or the image history................................................6-19 Search Algorithm................................................4-38 Searching for a sensor to be connected...............3-8 Selecting a display method for tools.....................5-7 Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose...........................................4-28 Selecting the file in the USB memory.................3-17 Selecting the tool................................................5-41 Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor.....5-6 Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu.........5-6 Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed..................................5-6 Sensor..........................................1-8, 1-13, 8-2, 8-6 Sensor Advanced screen.................................. A-11 Sensor advanced settings..................................6-25 Sensor Connect........................................ 6-45, 6-46 When connecting with the sensor via a network...............................6-46 When directly connecting with the sensor....6-46 Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)...............................6-14 Sensor Information.............................................6-43 Sensor Setup Menu screen................................. A-7 Sensor Setup screen......................................... A-14 Setting a search region............................ 4-35, 4-55 Setting a sensitivity................................... 4-36, 4-56 Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool..........4-40 Setting items for the Outline tool........................4-32 Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool....4-52 Setting range of the Output Assignment.............4-60 Settings after initialization.................................. A-40 Settings for disabling outlines................... 4-35, 4-55 Settings for the Trigger Options............................4-8 Settings List......................................................... A-6 Settings Navigator................................................4-2 Settings Navigator screen and operation flow......4-4 Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-45 Setting the Color Area/Area tool.........................4-42 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor....6-25 Setting the Image Optimization............................4-6 Setting the network address of the monitor..........3-7 Setting the Outline tool.......................................4-33 Setting the Output Assignment...........................4-61 Setting the Position Adjustment tool...................4-53 Setting the Trigger Options......................... 4-8, 4-10 Setting the upper limit.........................................4-46 Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-12 Setup Adjustment...............................................6-25 Shortening the imaging processing time............5-41 Shortening the Processing Time........................5-40 Shortening the processing time of each tool......5-41 Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool.....................................5-42


A-45

A

Index

A

Shortening the processing time of the Outline tool...................................................5-41 Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment......................................5-42 Specification of I/O circuit and current of the sensor..........................................2-14 Specifications.......................................................8-2 Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address..........................................................3-10 Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position...............................................................5-36 Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool....................5-39 If the area search becomes unstable due to unwanted colors being extracted..................5-39 If the color to be judged cannot be detected....5-39 Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-32 Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target.......................5-32 Stabilizing the Outline tool..................................5-38 If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target.....................................5-38 If the match rate difference between the high and low-quality-targets is small.......5-39 If the outline cannot be detected when the target becomes out of position......5-38 If the outline of the target cannot be detected........................................................5-39 If the target tilts and the outline cannot be detected........................................................5-39 Stabilizing the position adjustment.....................5-37 If the outline of the reference target cannot be detected.......................................5-38 If the position adjustment becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines...................................5-37 If the target tilts and the position adjustment becomes unstable......................5-37 Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning........5-16 Starting an Operation...........................................5-2 Starting the Settings Navigator.............................4-3 STATUS indicator light....................................... A-33 Status table......................................................... A-2 Stylus........................................................ 1-10, 8-12 Switching the display to the full-screen mode......5-5 System..................................................... 6-25, 6-45 System Configuration...........................................1-2

T Things can be performed with the program functions...............................................................6-8 Tilt Correction.....................................................6-38 Time....................................................................6-51 A-46

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15 Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information..........................................................5-26 Tool name................................................. 4-39, 4-49 Tool settings.......................................................5-36 Total Status Conditions.......................................4-65 Touch Calibration.....................................6-52 Touch Screen Lock.............................................6-50 Transfer Condition Settings................................6-34 Transfer Destination Folder Settings..................6-35 Transferring the settings backed up in the USB memory to the sensor.........................................6-21 Trigger number...................................................5-10 Troubleshooting................................................. A-19 Turning on the power and starting an operation....5-2 Types of tools.....................................................4-28

U Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter......2-11 Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter........2-9 Unmounting the sensor........................................2-5 Update Monitor...................................................6-53 Updating the sensor...........................................6-44 USB memory (1GB)............................................1-10 Useful features during installation/adjustment......6-4 Useful features while running...............................6-2 Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment...............5-35 Using the digital zooming function......................5-32 Using the dome attachment....................... 2-6, 5-35 Using the image files saved in the USB memory................................................5-15 Using the image history saved in the sensor......5-15 Using the images taken in the Test mode...........5-15 Using the polarizing filter attachment......... 2-7, 5-35 Using the program functions (changing over)....6-10 When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method...............................6-11 When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in the Program Switch Method.........................6-10 Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)...........1-4 Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................1-5

V Voltage input (When the PNP output is selected)....................2-14

W Wall mounting adapter...............................1-11, 8-12 When the NPN output is selected......................2-14 When the PNP output is selected.......................2-14 White Balance (for color type only)....................6-41


Index

MEMO

A


A-47

Revision history Revision history Edition number

Revision details

January, 2012

1st edition

May, 2012

2nd edition

Addition of screw hole (1/4-20UNC) to the mounting adapter. Revision for German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional). Revision for Tool Auto Tuning by registration information file.

August, 2012

3rd edition

Corresponds to the simulator function of the IV-Navigator.

December, 2012

4th edition

Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean. Addition of Logic output / Total Status NG output / RUN output. Addition of the FTP client function. Compatibility with field networks (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET).

December, 2013

5th edition

Ethernet and Monitor cable changed

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS (1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted. KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only (2) suggestions, and it is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products. (3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples. (4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS D ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS D ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply. BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3

Copyright (c) 2012 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244002E 1123-5 206GB Printed in Japan

Keyence Iv Series 343ub

Overview 5o1f4z

More details 6z3438

Related Documents c2h70

Keyence Iv Series 343ub

Keyence Iv Series 343ub

Keyence Iv-500 Programming 506d1j

Keyence-iv-manual-espanol.pdf 1r6i3u

Im- Infra Series Iv 725c2b

Keyence - Flowmeter 264o6h

More Documents from "Eduardo Vargas" 73222k

6g3p1u

Tratamiento Termico De Soldadura 183p6u

Manual Caldereria 4m2k4y

Preparacion Y Evaluacion De Proyectos - Sapag - Edicion 2 v6u4v

Manual Soldador 4b2w14

Plantilla Primera Entrega - Investigacion De Operaciones.docx 226q56